NXGPro+ Communication Manual

250
www.siemens.com/drives A5E50226719 Function Manual

Transcript of NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Page 1: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

www.siemens.com/drives

A5E50226719

Function Manual

Page 2: NXGPro+ Communication Manual
Page 3: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Function Manual

AAA5E50226719

Security information 1Safety notes 2Introduction 3Modbus Communication 4Modbus Ethernet Communication 5Ethernet / IP Communication 6

Profibus Communication 7DeviceNet Communication 8ControlNet Communication 9Appendix ASymbols and Abbreviations B

Page 4: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Legal informationWarning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGERindicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNINGindicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTIONindicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICEindicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified PersonnelThe product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens productsNote the following:

WARNINGSiemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

TrademarksAll names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of LiabilityWe have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AGLarge Drives ApplicationsVogelweiherstr. 1-1590441 NÜRNBERGGERMANY

A5E50226719Ⓟ 12/2020 Subject to change

Copyright © Siemens AG 2020.All rights reserved

Page 5: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table of contents

1 Security information............................................................................................................................ 112 Safety notes ......................................................................................................................................... 13

2.1 General Safety Information ................................................................................................ 132.2 Observing the Five Safety Rules.......................................................................................... 142.3 Safety Information and Warnings ....................................................................................... 152.4 ESD-sensitive Components................................................................................................. 17

3 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 193.1 Introduction Purpose ......................................................................................................... 193.2 Communication Overview.................................................................................................. 20

4 Modbus Communication ..................................................................................................................... 234.1 Anybus Modbus Module..................................................................................................... 244.2 Software Programming ...................................................................................................... 264.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive ...................................................................................... 264.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ............................................................................... 284.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing ..................................................................................... 304.3.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing prelude ......................................................................... 304.3.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address ........... 304.3.3 Parameter Tables ............................................................................................................... 324.3.4 Pick-list Variable Tables....................................................................................................... 364.3.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list Variables .......................................................................................... 414.4 Planning/Configuring ......................................................................................................... 444.4.1 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedback ........................................................... 454.4.2 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive ............................................................ 464.4.3 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP.......................... 474.4.4 Network Setup................................................................................................................... 474.4.5 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC) ............................................................. 494.4.6 Network Status (Pulse Timeout) ......................................................................................... 504.4.7 Supported Modbus Command Set ...................................................................................... 51

5 Modbus Ethernet Communication....................................................................................................... 535.1 Modbus Ethernet Description ............................................................................................. 535.2 AnyBus Ethernet Modbus Module....................................................................................... 545.3 Software Programming ...................................................................................................... 565.3.1 Section Overview............................................................................................................... 565.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive ...................................................................................... 575.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ............................................................................... 595.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing ..................................................................................... 615.4.1 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configuration ............................................... 61

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 3

Page 6: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

5.4.2 Parameter Assignment Addressing prelude ......................................................................... 625.4.3 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (G28,

G38).................................................................................................................................. 625.4.4 Network Control Menu....................................................................................................... 645.4.5 Pick-list Variable Tables....................................................................................................... 675.4.6 Data-to-Drive Pick-list Variables .......................................................................................... 715.5 Planning/Configuring ......................................................................................................... 745.5.1 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configuration ............................................... 745.5.2 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedback ........................................................... 755.5.3 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP.......................... 765.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive ............................................................ 775.5.5 Network Setup................................................................................................................... 775.5.6 Network Status Detection................................................................................................... 79

6 Ethernet / IP Communication............................................................................................................... 816.1 Ethernet / IP Description..................................................................................................... 816.2 AnyBus Ethernet / IP Module .............................................................................................. 826.3 Software Programming ...................................................................................................... 846.3.1 Section Overview............................................................................................................... 846.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the drive ...................................................................................... 846.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the drive ............................................................................... 866.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing.................................................................................... 886.4.1 Parameter Assignment / Addressing Prelude ....................................................................... 886.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address ........... 886.4.3 Parameter Tables ............................................................................................................... 896.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables....................................................................................................... 926.4.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list Variables .......................................................................................... 966.5 Planning / Configuring........................................................................................................ 996.5.1 Planning Configuring Introduction...................................................................................... 996.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configuration ............................................... 996.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedback ......................................................... 1006.5.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP........................ 1016.5.5 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive .......................................................... 1026.5.6 Setup Example................................................................................................................. 1036.5.7 Network Status Detection................................................................................................. 104

7 Profibus Communication .................................................................................................................. 1077.1 Profibus Description ......................................................................................................... 1077.2 AnyBus Profibus Modbus Module...................................................................................... 1087.3 Software Programming .................................................................................................... 1107.3.1 Section Overview............................................................................................................. 1107.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .................................................................................... 1117.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the drive ............................................................................. 1137.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing ................................................................................... 1157.4.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing prelude ....................................................................... 1157.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address ......... 1157.4.3 Parameter Tables ............................................................................................................. 1177.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables..................................................................................................... 120

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication Manual4 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 7: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.4.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list Variables ........................................................................................ 1247.5 Planning/Configuring ....................................................................................................... 1277.5.1 Planning Configuring Introduction.................................................................................... 1277.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configuration ............................................. 1277.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedback ......................................................... 1287.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive .......................................................... 1297.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP........................ 1307.5.6 Network Setup................................................................................................................. 1307.5.7 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC) ........................................................... 1327.5.8 Network Status (Auto Detect) ........................................................................................... 1337.5.9 PLC Setup Using GSD Files ................................................................................................ 133

8 DeviceNet Communication ................................................................................................................ 1358.1 DeviceNet Description...................................................................................................... 1358.2 AnyBus DeviceNet Module ............................................................................................... 1368.3 Software Programming .................................................................................................... 1388.3.1 Section Overview............................................................................................................. 1388.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .................................................................................... 1398.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ............................................................................. 1418.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing ................................................................................... 1438.4.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing prelude ....................................................................... 1438.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address ......... 1438.4.3 Parameter Tables ............................................................................................................. 1448.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables..................................................................................................... 1478.4.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list Variables ........................................................................................ 1518.5 Planning/Configuring ....................................................................................................... 1548.5.1 Planning Configuring Introduction.................................................................................... 1548.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configuration ............................................. 1548.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedback ......................................................... 1558.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive .......................................................... 1568.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP........................ 1578.5.6 Network Setup................................................................................................................. 1578.5.7 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC) ........................................................... 1598.5.8 Network Status (Auto Detect) ........................................................................................... 1608.5.9 PLC Setup using EDS files.................................................................................................. 160

9 ControlNet Communication............................................................................................................... 1639.1 ConrolNet Description...................................................................................................... 1639.2 Anybus ControlNet Module .............................................................................................. 1649.3 Software Programming .................................................................................................... 1669.3.1 Section Overview............................................................................................................. 1669.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .................................................................................... 1669.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ............................................................................. 1689.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing ................................................................................ 1709.4.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing prelude ....................................................................... 1709.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (G28,

G38)................................................................................................................................ 1709.4.3 Parameter Tables ............................................................................................................. 172

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 5

Page 8: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables..................................................................................................... 1759.5 Planning/Configuring ....................................................................................................... 1799.5.1 Planning Configuring Introduction.................................................................................... 1799.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configuration ............................................. 1799.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedback ......................................................... 1809.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive .......................................................... 1819.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP........................ 1829.5.6 Network Setup................................................................................................................. 1829.5.7 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC) ........................................................... 1849.5.8 Network Status (Auto Detect) ........................................................................................... 1859.5.9 PLC Setup using EDS files.................................................................................................. 185

A Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 187A.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs............................................................................................. 187A.1.1 Internal Analog Outputs................................................................................................... 203A.1.2 Internal Test Points........................................................................................................... 204A.1.3 External Analog Inputs ..................................................................................................... 208A.1.4 External Analog Outputs .................................................................................................. 208A.1.5 Comparators.................................................................................................................... 210A.1.6 Historic Log Variables....................................................................................................... 211A.1.7 Meter Status Variables...................................................................................................... 211A.1.8 To Drive Communication.................................................................................................. 213A.1.9 From Drive Communication.............................................................................................. 214A.2 Display Network Monitor.................................................................................................. 217A.3 Parameter Read / Write ..................................................................................................... 219A.3.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 219A.3.2 Setting up the PTD and PFD registers ................................................................................ 219A.3.3 Defining the PFD Registers................................................................................................ 220A.3.4 Defining the PTD Registers................................................................................................ 221A.3.5 PLC handshaking procedure for parameter read/write ....................................................... 223A.4 Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers ..................................................................................... 225

B Symbols and Abbreviations ............................................................................................................... 227Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 233Index .................................................................................................................................................. 245

Tables

Table 4-1 Communication Status LED* .................................................................................................... 24Table 4-2 Device Status LED* .................................................................................................................. 24Table 4-3 Device Connector* .................................................................................................................. 25Table 4-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits........................................................................................ 26Table 4-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) .............................................. 27Table 4-6 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) .............................................. 27Table 4-7 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)............................................ 28Table 4-8 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)............................................ 29

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication Manual6 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 9: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 4-9 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address.......................................... 31Table 4-10 Network Control Menu (9943) ................................................................................................ 32Table 4-11 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)....................................................................................... 32Table 4-12 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)......................................................................................... 32Table 4-13 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902) ....................................................................... 33Table 4-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)................................................................... 34Table 4-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)....................................................................... 34Table 4-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)......................................................................................... 34Table 4-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916) ....................................................................... 35Table 4-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)................................................................... 36Table 4-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)....................................................................... 36Table 4-20 Data from Drive Pick-list Variables............................................................................................ 36Table 4-21 Data-to-Drive Pick-list .............................................................................................................. 41Table 4-22 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ............................................................................. 44Table 4-23 General Status Bits (default definitions) Table .......................................................................... 46Table 4-24 Table of Completed Settings for Given Example ....................................................................... 50Table 5-1 Network Status LED1 ............................................................................................................... 54Table 5-2 Module Status LED1................................................................................................................. 55Table 5-3 Link / Activity Status LED1 ........................................................................................................ 55Table 5-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits........................................................................................ 56Table 5-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) .............................................. 58Table 5-6 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) .............................................. 58Table 5-7 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)............................................ 59Table 5-8 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)............................................ 60Table 5-9 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ............................................................................. 61Table 5-10 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address.......................................... 63Table 5-11 Network Control Menu (9943) ................................................................................................ 64Table 5-12 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)....................................................................................... 64Table 5-13 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)......................................................................................... 64Table 5-14 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902) ....................................................................... 65Table 5-15 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)................................................................... 65Table 5-16 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)....................................................................... 65Table 5-17 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)......................................................................................... 66Table 5-18 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916) ....................................................................... 66Table 5-19 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)................................................................... 66Table 5-20 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)....................................................................... 67Table 5-21 Data from Drive Pick-list Variables............................................................................................ 67Table 5-22 Data-to-Drive Pick-list .............................................................................................................. 71Table 5-23 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ............................................................................. 75

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 7

Page 10: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 5-24 General Status Bits (default definitions) Table .......................................................................... 76Table 6-1 Network Status LED1 ............................................................................................................... 82Table 6-2 Module Status LED1................................................................................................................. 83Table 6-3 Link / Activity Status LED1 ........................................................................................................ 83Table 6-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits........................................................................................ 84Table 6-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) .............................................. 85Table 6-6 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) .............................................. 85Table 6-7 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)............................................ 86Table 6-8 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)............................................ 87Table 6-9 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address.......................................... 88Table 6-10 Network Control Menu (9943) ................................................................................................ 89Table 6-11 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)....................................................................................... 89Table 6-12 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)......................................................................................... 89Table 6-13 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902) ....................................................................... 90Table 6-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)................................................................... 90Table 6-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)....................................................................... 90Table 6-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)......................................................................................... 91Table 6-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916) ....................................................................... 91Table 6-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)................................................................... 91Table 6-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)....................................................................... 92Table 6-20 Data from Drive Pick-list Variables............................................................................................ 92Table 6-21 Data-to-Drive Pick-list .............................................................................................................. 96Table 6-22 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ........................................................................... 100Table 6-23 General Status Bits (default definitions) Table ........................................................................ 101Table 6-24 Table of Completed Settings for Given Example ..................................................................... 104Table 7-1 Operation Mode LED1............................................................................................................ 108Table 7-2 Module Status LED1............................................................................................................... 109Table 7-3 Profibus Connector 1.............................................................................................................. 109Table 7-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................... 110Table 7-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) ............................................ 112Table 7-6 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464).......................................... 113Table 7-7 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564).......................................... 114Table 7-8 SOP Source Code - (setting flag to correspond to medium voltage low fault) .......................... 114Table 7-9 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address........................................ 116Table 7-10 Network Control Menu (9943) .............................................................................................. 117Table 7-11 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)..................................................................................... 117Table 7-12 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)....................................................................................... 117Table 7-13 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902) ..................................................................... 118Table 7-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)................................................................. 118

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication Manual8 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 11: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 7-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)..................................................................... 118Table 7-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)....................................................................................... 119Table 7-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916) ..................................................................... 119Table 7-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)................................................................. 119Table 7-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)..................................................................... 120Table 7-20 Data from Drive Pick-list Variables.......................................................................................... 120Table 7-21 Data-to-Drive Pick-list ............................................................................................................ 124Table 7-22 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ........................................................................... 127Table 7-23 General Status Bits (default definitions) Table ........................................................................ 129Table 7-24 Table of Completed Settings for Given Example ..................................................................... 133Table 8-1 Network Status LED1 ............................................................................................................. 136Table 8-2 Module Status LED1............................................................................................................... 137Table 8-3 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................... 138Table 8-4 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) ............................................ 140Table 8-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464).......................................... 141Table 8-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564).......................................... 142Table 8-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Register Data............................................. 144Table 8-8 Network Control Menu (9943) .............................................................................................. 144Table 8-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)..................................................................................... 144Table 8-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)....................................................................................... 145Table 8-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902) ..................................................................... 145Table 8-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)................................................................. 145Table 8-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)..................................................................... 146Table 8-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)....................................................................................... 146Table 8-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916) ..................................................................... 146Table 8-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)................................................................. 147Table 8-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)..................................................................... 147Table 8-18 Data from Drive Pick-list Variables.......................................................................................... 147Table 8-19 Data-to-Drive Pick-list ............................................................................................................ 151Table 8-20 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ........................................................................... 154Table 8-21 General Status Bits (default definitions) Table ........................................................................ 156Table 8-22 Table of Completed Settings for Given Example ..................................................................... 160Table 9-1 Network Status LED1 ............................................................................................................. 164Table 9-2 Module Status LED1............................................................................................................... 165Table 9-3 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................... 166Table 9-4 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) ............................................ 167Table 9-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464).......................................... 168Table 9-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564).......................................... 169Table 9-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Register Data............................................. 171

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 9

Page 12: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 9-8 Network Control Menu (9943) .............................................................................................. 172Table 9-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)..................................................................................... 172Table 9-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)....................................................................................... 172Table 9-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902) ..................................................................... 173Table 9-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)................................................................. 173Table 9-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)..................................................................... 173Table 9-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)....................................................................................... 174Table 9-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916) ..................................................................... 174Table 9-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)................................................................. 174Table 9-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)..................................................................... 175Table 9-18 Data from Drive Pick-list Variables.......................................................................................... 175Table 9-19 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table ........................................................................... 179Table 9-20 General Status Bits (default definitions) Table ........................................................................ 181Table 9-21 Table of Completed Settings for Given Example ..................................................................... 185Table A-1 Menu Parameter Pick List IDs................................................................................................. 187Table A-2 Contents of PFD Registers 1 to 4............................................................................................ 220Table A-3 Contents of PTD Registers 1 to 4............................................................................................ 221Table A-4 Available ID Function Commands .......................................................................................... 222Table B-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations.............................................................................................. 227

Figures

Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures ......................................................................................................... 18Figure 3-1 NXGPro+ Control showing connectors to Anybus modules ....................................................... 21Figure 4-1 AnybusModbus Module Status Indicator Locations .................................................................. 24Figure 5-1 Anybus Ethernet Module Status Indicators............................................................................... 54Figure 6-1 Ethernet/IP Commuication Connector Status Indicator Locations.............................................. 82Figure 7-1 Anybus Profibus M40 AB6600 with logo ................................................................................ 108Figure 8-1 DeviceNet Communication Module Status Indicator Locations ............................................... 136Figure 9-1 ControlNet Module with Status Indicator Locations................................................................ 164Figure A-1 Display Network Monitor Function ........................................................................................ 217

Table of contents

NXGPro+ Communication Manual10 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 13: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Security information 1Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions form one element of such a concept.Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. These systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise network or the Internet if and only to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures (firewalls and/or network segmentation) in place.You can find more information on protective measures in the area of industrial security by visiting:https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends performing product updates as soon as they are available and using only the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed underhttps://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 11

Page 14: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Security information

NXGPro+ Communication Manual12 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 15: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Safety notes 22.1 General Safety Information

Proper Use SINAMICS Perfect Harmony™ GH180 medium voltage drives must always be installed in closed electrical operating areas. The drive is connected to the industrial network via a circuit-breaker or contactor that is electrically connected to the VFD control to enable the drive protection features. The specific transport conditions must be observed when the equipment is transported. The equipment shall be assembled/installed and the separate cabinet units connected properly by cable and/or busbar in accordance with the assembly/installation instructions. The relevant instructions regarding correct storage, EMC-compliant installation, cabling, shielding and grounding and an adequate auxiliary power supply must be strictly observed. Fault-free operation is also dependent on careful operation and maintenance.The power sections are designed for variable-speed drives use with synchronous and asynchronous motors. Operating modes, overload conditions, load cycles, and ambient conditions different to those described in this document are allowed only by special arrangement with the manufacturer. Commissioning should only be carried out by trained service personnel in accordance with the commissioning instructions. System components such as circuit-breaker, transformer, cables, cooling unit, motor, speed sensors, etc., must be matched to VFD operation. System configuration may only be carried out by an experienced system integrator.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 13

Page 16: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

2.2 Observing the Five Safety RulesThere are five safety rules that must always be observed to assure not only personal safety, but to prevent material damage as well. Always obey safety-related labels located on the product itself and always read and understand each safety precaution prior to operating or working on the drive.The five safety rules: 1. Disconnect the power applied to the system.2. Protect against reapplication of power.3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized.4. Apply grounding (earthing) means.5. Cover or enclose adjacent components to secure all forms of hazardous energy.

DANGERDanger Due to High VoltagesHigh voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if the equipment is handled incorrectly.Potentially fatal voltages occur when this equipment is in operation which can remain present even after the VFD is switched off.Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel carry out work on the equipment.Follow the five safety rules during each stage of the work.

Safety notes2.2 Observing the Five Safety Rules

NXGPro+ Communication Manual14 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 17: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

2.3 Safety Information and Warnings

DANGERHazardous Voltage! • Always follow the proper lock-out/tag-out procedures before beginning any maintenance

or troubleshooting work on the VFD. • Always follow standard safety precautions and local codes during installation of external

wiring. The installation must follow wiring practices and insulation systems as specified in IEC 61800-5-1.

• Hazardous voltages may still exist within the VFD cabinets even when the disconnect switch is open (off) and the supply power is shut off.

• Only qualified individuals should install, operate, troubleshoot, and maintain this VFD. A qualified individual is "a person, who is familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved."

• Always work with one hand, wear electrical safety gloves, wear insulated electrical hazard rated safety shoes, and safety goggles. Also, always work with another person present.

• Always use extreme caution when handling or measuring components that are inside the enclosure. Be careful to prevent meter leads from shorting together or from touching other terminals.

• Use only instrumentation (e.g., meters, oscilloscopes, etc.) intended for high voltage measurements (that is, isolation is provided inside the instrument, not provided by isolating the chassis ground of the instrument).

• Never assume that switching off the input disconnector will remove all voltage from internal components. Voltage is still present on the terminals of the input disconnector. Also, there may be voltages present that are applied from other external sources.

• Never touch anything within the VFD cabinets until verifying that it is neither thermally hot nor electrically alive.

• Never remove safety shields (marked with a HIGH VOLTAGE sign) or attempt to measure points beneath the shields.

• Never operate the VFD with cabinet doors open. The only exception is the control cabinet.• Never connect any grounded (i.e., non-isolated) meters or oscilloscopes to the system.• Never connect or disconnect any meters, wiring, or printed circuit boards while the VFD is

energized.• Never defeat the instrument’s grounding.• When a system is configured with VFD bypass switchgear (e.g. contactors between line and

motor, and VFD and motor), these switches should be interlocked so that the line voltage is never applied to the VFD output if the medium voltage input is removed from the VFD.

• When a system is configured with VFD pre-charge, medium voltage is present on the primary side of the input transformer and upstream device even though the MV contactor is not closed.

Safety notes2.3 Safety Information and Warnings

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 15

Page 18: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

WARNINGPotential Arc Hazard• Arcing can result in damage to property, serious injury and even death. • The equipment has not been tested and rated for arc flash protection.• Avoiding arc hazard risks is dependent upon proper installation and maintenance.• Incorrectly applied equipment, incorrectly selected, connected or unconnected cables, or

the presence of foreign materials can cause arcing in the equipment.• Follow all applicable precautionary rules and guidelines as used in working with medium

voltage equipment.• The equipment may be used only:

– for the applications defined as suitable in the technical description.– in combination with equipment and components supplied by other manufacturers

which have been approved and recommended by Siemens.• Always follow the facility / installation site rules / guidelines for Personal Protectiive

Equipment (PPE) based on the Arc Flash study of that facility.

Additional safety precautions and warnings appear throughout this manual. These important messages should be followed to reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage.

WARNINGObey Rules to Avoid Risk of Death• Always comply with local codes and requirements if disposal of failed components is

necessary.• Always ensure the use of an even and flat truck bed to transport the VFD system. Before

unloading, be sure that the concrete pad is level for storage and permanent positioning.• Always confirm proper tonnage ratings of cranes, cables, and hooks when lifting the VFD

system. Dropping the cabinet or lowering it too quickly could damage the unit.• Never disconnect control power while medium voltage is energized. This could cause

severe system overheating and/or damage.• Never store flammable material in, on, or near the drive enclosure. This includes equipment

drawings and manuals.• Never use fork trucks to lift cabinets that are not equipped with lifting tubes. Be sure that

the fork truck tines fit the lifting tubes properly and are the appropriate length.

Safety notes2.3 Safety Information and Warnings

NXGPro+ Communication Manual16 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 19: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

2.4 ESD-sensitive Components

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)

NOTICEESD Sensitive Equipment• Always be aware of electrostatic discharge (ESD) when working near or touching

components inside the VFD cabinet. The printed circuit boards contain components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Handling and servicing of components that are sensitive to ESD should be done only by qualified personnel and only after reading and understanding proper ESD techniques. The following ESD guidelines should be observed. Following these rules can greatly reduce the possibility of ESD damage to printed circuit board (PCB) components.

• Always transport static sensitive equipment in antistatic bags.• Always use a soldering iron that has a grounded tip. Also, use either a metallic vacuum-style

plunger or copper braid when desoldering.• Ensure that anyone handling the printed circuit boards is wearing a properly grounded static

strap. The wrist strap should be connected to ground through a 1 Megohm resistor. Grounding kits are available commercially through most electronic wholesalers.

• Static charge build-up can be removed from a conductive object by touching the object with a properly grounded piece of metal.

• When handling a PC board, always hold the card by its edges.• Do not slide printed circuit boards (PCBs) across any surface (e.g., a table or work bench).

If possible, perform PCB maintenance at a workstation that has a conductive covering that is grounded through a 1 Megohm resistor. If a conductive tabletop cover is unavailable, a clean steel or aluminum tabletop is an excellent substitute.

• Avoid plastic Styrofoam™, vinyl and other non-conductive materials. They are excellent static generators and do not give up their charge easily.

• When returning components to Siemens Industry, Inc. always use static-safe packing. This limits any further component damage due to ESD.

Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

NOTICEElectrostatic dischargeElectronic components can be destroyed in the event of improper handling, transporting, storage, and shipping.Pack the electronic components in appropriate ESD packaging; e.g. ESD foam, ESD packaging bags and ESD transport containers.To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.

Safety notes2.4 ESD-sensitive Components

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 17

Page 20: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

• Avoid physical contact with electronic components. If you need to perform absolutely essential work on these components, then you must wear one of the following protective gear:– Grounded ESD wrist strap– ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips if there is also an ESD floor.

• Do not place electronic components close to data terminals, monitors or televisions. Maintain a minimum clearance to the screen (> 10 cm).

• Electronic components should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of synthetic fibers.

• Place components in contact with ESD-suited materials e.g. ESD tables, ESD surfaces, ESD packaging.

• Measure on the components only if one of the following conditions is met:– The measuring device is grounded with a protective conductor.– The measuring head of a floating measuring device has been discharged directly before

the measurement.The necessary ESD protective measures for the entire working range for electrostatically sensitive devices are illustrated once again in the following drawings. Precise instructions for ESD protective measures are specified in the standard IEC 61340-5-1.

1 Sitting2 Standing3 Standing/sittinga Conductive floor surface, only effective in conjunction with ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding

stripsb ESD furniturec ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips are only effective in conjunction with conductive flooringd ESD clothinge ESD wristbandf Cabinet ground connection

Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures

Safety notes2.4 ESD-sensitive Components

NXGPro+ Communication Manual18 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 21: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Introduction 33.1 Introduction Purpose

The SINAMICS Perfect Harmony™ GH180 medium voltage drives maintain a common control system, the NXGPro+ Control. The NXGPro+ Communication manual is one component in a series of manuals intended for use with the SINAMICS Perfect Harmony™ GH180 medium voltage drives. This manual describes the NXGPro+ communication hardware and the communication protocols that can be used to enable communication to and from the drive. It also covers programming and configuration information for each communication protocol, specific function descriptions and parameter assignment necessary for communication setup and operation.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 19

Page 22: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3.2 Communication OverviewEach NXGPro+ Control System has two communication connectors that enable network communication through a variety of communication protocols. The system supports up to two networks.Connectivity for network protocols is possible with optional controller cards, called Anybus™ modules, which plug into the field bus communication card.Anybus™ modules are available from Siemens and support the following protocols:• Modbus™ Communication• Modbus™ Ethernet• Ethernet /IP• Profibus™• DeviceNet™ (Profile 12)• ControlNet™

NoteDisplay the type of Anybus™ modules installed in the system using parameter 'Network Module Type' (9955).This information may be needed to verify you have the correct module for the network interface to be implemented.

The following figure shows the NXGPro+ Control and includes the locations of the connectors for the Anybus™ modules (network 1 and 2).

Introduction3.2 Communication Overview

NXGPro+ Communication Manual20 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 23: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Figure 3-1 NXGPro+ Control showing connectors to Anybus modules

Introduction3.2 Communication Overview

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 21

Page 24: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Introduction3.2 Communication Overview

NXGPro+ Communication Manual22 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 25: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Modbus Communication 4Modbus Description

This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a Modbus™ network. It addresses the following topics:• Description of the interface• User Programming • Parameter assignment and addressing • Configuration and setup options• Available functionsThe Modbus™ communication interface is a serial interface that operates at standard baud rates up to 19.2 Kbaud with a 10-bit data frame. The drive always acts as a Modbus™ node, which means that the drive does not initiate dialog on the Modbus™ network. Rather, it listens to and then responds to the Modbus™ controller (the PLC).

NoteOnly register-based read and write functions of the Modbus™ protocol are supported. These functions are used to monitor and control analog and digital inputs and outputs of the drive. The NXGPro+ Control supports only the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) format of the Modbus™ protocol.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 23

Page 26: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.1 Anybus Modbus ModuleThe Anybus Modbus™ module supports Modbus™ communication. The module plugs into the Network 1 connector or the Network 2 connector on the NXGPro+ DCR. Refer to figure NXGPro+ Control as shown in the Introduction chapter.The Anybus Modbus™ module as shown below, displays the connector and status indicators. Refer to the tables to view the LED states and descriptions.

Figure 4-1 AnybusModbus Module Status Indicator LocationsRefer to the following tables to view explainations of the communication status LED and the device status LED.

Table 4-1 Communication Status LED*

LED State DescriptionOff No power or no trafficYellow LED will flash during correct reception and transmission (20 ms on, 40 ms off)Red Fatal error occurred

* as shown in Item 1 in figure Anybus Modbus™ Module Status Indicator Locations

Table 4-2 Device Status LED*

LED State DescriptionOff Initializing or no powerGreen Module initialized, no errorRed Internal error or major unrecoverable faultRed, single flash Communication fault or configuration error

• Case 1: Invalid settings in Network Configuration Object• Case 2: Settings in the Network Configuration Object has been changed during run‐

time (i.e. the setting does not match the currently used configuration)Red, double flash Application diagnostics available

* as shown in Item 2 in Anybus Modbus™ Connector Status Indicator Locations

Modbus Communication4.1 Anybus Modbus Module

NXGPro+ Communication Manual24 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 27: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The Device Connector table contains information regarding each pin (direction and signal). The comments column contains expanded description.

Table 4-3 Device Connector*

Pin Direction Signal CommentHousing - PE Protective Earth

1 - GND Bus polarization, ground (isolated)2 Output 5V Bus polarization, power +5V DC (isolated)3 Input PMC Connect to pin #2 for RS-232 operation

Leave unconnected for RS-498 operation4 - - -5 Bidirectional B-Line RS-485 B-Line (+)6 - - -7 Input Rx RS-232 Data Receive8 Output Tx RS-232 Data Transmit9 Bidirectional A-Line RS-485 B-Line (+)

* as shown in Item 3 in figure Anybus Modbus™ Module Status Indicator Locations The Anybus Modbus™ module has fixed pin assignments for Data A and Data B. The figure RS485 Pin Assignments shows the output pin configuration for RS485.Termination ResistorThe Anybus Modbus™ module does not contain a network termination resistor.

NoteIf the Anybus Modbus module is the last node on the network, an external network termination resistor should be added.

Modbus Communication4.1 Anybus Modbus Module

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 25

Page 28: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.2 Software Programming

Section OverviewThis section provides details for user programming through the SOP. The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition of the bits, complete the steps as described.1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits

controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup for

– programmable inputs to the drive– programmable outputs from the drive

The table Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits available for use in the SOP (drctry.plus bits).

Table 4-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register BitsPick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Corresponding Drctry.plus bits Modbus Address for Register Set One

Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set Two

Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Net‐work1FixedRegBit15_I

40257 40065

Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Net‐work1FixedRegBit15_I

40257 40065

4.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.It can be seen that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data to drive pick-list variables.

Modbus Communication4.2 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual26 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 29: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.The corresponding bits from the drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit.RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

4. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on in the same manner for the next set of 16 bits.

Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

The pick-list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 4-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_INet Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I

Table 4-6 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I

Modbus Communication4.2 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 27

Page 30: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium voltage:• The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using

the procedure described in the previous paragraphs.• The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the

following SOP source code:;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;

• The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input medium voltage trip.

4.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive

DescriptionThere are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register 'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).

2. Enter parameter ID (9403). 3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List

Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list variables.

4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on. The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 4-7 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O

Modbus Communication4.2 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual28 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 31: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O

Table 4-8 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input medium voltage:• The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using

the procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following

SOP source code:;Monitor medium volage fault on the Modbus networkNetwork1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;

• This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.

• The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a medium voltage fault occurred.

Modbus Communication4.2 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 29

Page 32: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

4.3.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing preludeThis section provides the following information for communication configuration and programming:• Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address• Parameter tables:

– Network configuration parameters– Network 1 configuration parameters– Network 2 configuration parameters

• Pick-list variable tables:– Data from Drive variables– Data to Drive variables

4.3.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address

The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Modbus™ addresses. The following data is provided:• Parameter ID

The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.• Modbus™ Address

A digital location provided by the Modbus™ Protocol, which stores values for use by the controller (PLC) and node (Siemens drive) devices. To establish functional communication between the PLC and the drive via the drive's Modbus™ connection, the control software in the drive must be configured to know what certain addresses are used for.

• Data From DriveData that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track any of a number of drive status choices.

• Data To DriveData that the PLC will send to the drive to control it. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control any of a number of drive function choices.

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual30 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 33: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 4-9 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus AddressNetwork Parameter

IDDescription Default Con‐

tents Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set One

Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set Two

1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status(not changea‐ble)

40257 40001

1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changea‐ble)

40258 40002

1 9403 to 9464

Data From Drive 03 to 64

None 40259 to 40320 40003 to 40064

1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changea‐ble)

40001 40065

1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity De‐mand (not changea‐ble)

40002 40066

1 9603 to 9664

Data To Drive 03 to 64

None 40003 to 40064 440067 to 40128

2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status(not changea‐ble)

40257 40001

2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changea‐ble)

40258 40002

2 9503 to 9564

Data From Drive 03 to 64

None 40259 to 40320 40003 to 40064

2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable)

40001 40065

2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity De‐mand(not changea‐ble)

40002 40066

2 9703 to 9764

Data To Drive 03 to 64

None 40003 to 40064 40067 to 40128

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 31

Page 34: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.3.3 Parameter Tables

Network Parameters

Table 4-10 Network Control Menu (9943)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net Control Type 9944 SOP Set bit definition:

• SOP• Fixed

Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:• Maintained• Momentary

Table 4-11 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2

registers.

Network 1 Parameters

Table 4-12 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to

the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet• Ethernet I/P

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual32 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 35: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 4-13 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Modbus Baud Rate 9060 19200 Set the Modbus network baud rate:

• 1200• 2400• 4800• 9600• 19200

Modbus Parity 9047 None Set the Modbus parity:• none• odd• even

Modbus Stop Bits 9048 1 Set the Modbus stop bits:• one• two

Modbus Address 9070 1 1 247 Set the address of the node on the Modbus network. Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:

• % • RPM• Hz

Modbus Reg. Set 9101 One Select Register Set for Network 11

• OneSelects Modbus Registers40257 - 40320 for From-Drive40001 - 40064 for To-Drive

• TwoSelects Modbus Registers40001 - 40064 for From-Drive40065 - 40128 for To-Drive

Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network Timeout 9934 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-re‐sponsive.

1 Modbus Reg. Set "Two" provides backward compatibility only. Modbus Reg. Set "One" provides improved network response with respect to Modbus Reg. Set "Two".

Note Frame size limited to 10 bits. Stop bits have priority over parity bit.

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 33

Page 36: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 4-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to

9464 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 4-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg

Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to

9664 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Network 2 Parameters

Table 4-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Ma

x Description

Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet • Ethernet I/P

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual34 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 37: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 4-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Modbus Baud Rate 9917 19200 Set the Modbus network baud rate:

• 1200• 2400• 4800• 9600• 19200

Modbus Parity 9947 None Set the Modbus parity:• none• odd• even

Modbus Stop Bits 9948 1 Set the Modbus stop bits:• one• two

Modbus Address 9920 1 1 247 Set the address of the node on the Modbus network. Modbus Reg. Set 9102 One Select Register Set for Network 21

• OneSelects Modbus Registers40257 - 40320 for From-Drive40001 - 40064 for To-Drive

• TwoSelects Modbus Registers40001 - 40064 for From-Drive40065 - 40128 for To-Drive

Velocity Units 9924 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the net‐work.

Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network Timeout 9935 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-re‐sponsive.

1 Modbus Reg. Set "Two" provides backward compatibility only. Modbus Reg. Set "One" provides improved network response with respect to Modbus Reg. Set "Two".

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 35

Page 38: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 4-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to

9564 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 4-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to

9764 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

4.3.4 Pick-list Variable Tables

Table 4-20 Data from Drive Pick-list VariablesName Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNone None None None None NoneMan Id None None None None Refer to appendix Internal Drive Net‐

work

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual36 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 39: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesGeneral Status 2001 None None Bit Field • Bit 0: Fault

• Bit 1: Alarm• Bit 2: Running Forward • Bit 3: Running Reverse • Bit 4: Drive Ready • Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Net‐

work • Bit 6: Speed Reference From Net‐

work • Bit 7: At Speed Reference • Bit 8: Speed In Percent • Bit 9: Speed In RPM• Bit 10: Speed In Hz• Bit 11: Reserved for future use • Bit 12: Reserved for future use • Bit 13: Reserved for future use • Bit 14: Reserved for future use • Bit 15: Reserved for future use

Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed Motor Speed 2014 %

RPMHz

/10/1/10

Unsigned

Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecondDrive State 2210 None None Unsigned • 0 = Off

• 1 = Magnetizing• 2 = Spinning Load• 3 = Autotune• 4 = Run• 5 = Stop• 6 = Coast• 7 = Up Transfer• 8 = Down Transfer

Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Net‐

work1Flag15_I

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 37

Page 40: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNet1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Net‐

work1Flag31_INet1 Out Reg 3 2004 Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Net‐

work1Flag37_INet1 Out Reg 4 2005 Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Net‐

work1Flag63_INet2 Out Reg 1 2006 Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Net‐

work2Flag15_INet2 Out Reg 2 2007 Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Net‐

work2Flag31_INet2 Out Reg 3 2008 Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Net‐

work2Flag37_INet2 Out Reg 4 2009 Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Net‐

work2Flag63_ITorque Current 2150 Amps Unsigned Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps Unsigned Motor Flux 2015 % Unsigned Motor Torque 2160 % Unsigned Flux Reference 2011 % Unsigned Input Voltage 2120 Volts Unsigned Inp Power Factor 2012 % Unsigned Input KVars 2013 KVAR Unsigned Max Available Out‐put

2016 Volts /1 Unsigned

Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest CellMux1 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux1 Data None None None None Refer to appendixMultiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data Registers

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual38 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 41: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesMux6 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux7 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersWAGO Inputs 1 -16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - External‐

DigitalInput01h_IExternalDigitalInput02a_I - External‐DigitalInput02h_I

WAGO Inputs 17 - 32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - External‐DigitalInput03h_IExternalDigitalInput04a_I - External‐DigitalInput04h_I

WAGO Inputs 33 - 48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - External‐DigitalInput05h_IExternalDigitalInput06a_I - External‐DigitalInput06h_I

WAGO Inputs 49 - 64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - External‐DigitalInput07h_IExternalDigitalInput08a_I - External‐DigitalInput08h_I

WAGO Inputs 65 - 80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - External‐DigitalInput09h_IExternalDigitalInput10a_I - External‐DigitalInput10h_I

WAGO Inputs 81 - 96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - External‐DigitalInput11h_IExternalDigitalInput12a_I - External‐DigitalInput12h_I

WAGO Outputs 1 - 16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput01h_OExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput02h_O

WAGO Outputs 17 - 32

2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput03h_OExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput04h_O

WAGO Outputs 33 - 48

2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput05h_OExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput06h_O

WAGO Outputs 49 - 64

2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput07h_OExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput08h_O

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 39

Page 42: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesPFD1 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePFD2 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePFD3 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePFD4 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteDrive Losses 2161 % / 100 Unsigned Excessive Reactive Current

2162 & / 100 Unsigned

Speed Droop Percent 2163 & / 100 Unsigned Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 & / 100 Unsigned Avail Reactive Cur‐rent

2653 % / 100 Unsigned

Drive Efficiency 2168 % / 100 Unsigned Ids Ref Current 2276 % / 100 Unsigned

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual40 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 43: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.3.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list Variables

Table 4-21 Data-to-Drive Pick-listName None None None None NoneFixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field • When parameter 'Net Control

Type' (9945) is set to 'SOP' the bits will be used in teh SOP to control drive functions.

• When parameter 'Net Control Tyupe' (9945) is set to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as fol‐lows in the control software:– Bit 0: Run Forward– Bit 1: Run Reverse– Bit 2: Fault Reset– Bit 3: Stop– Bit 4: Reserved– Bit 5: Start / Stop Control

from Networkj– Bit 6: Spped Command

from Network– Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for fu‐

ture assignmentVelocity Demand

Hz / 10 Signed Speed DemandRPM 1% / 10

Auxiliary Demand Hz / 10 Signed Auxiliary Speed Demand RPM 1 % / 10Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag0_I ~ Net‐work1Flag15_INetwork 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag0_I ~ Net‐work2Flag15_I

Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags: Network1Flag16_I ~ Net‐work1Flag31_INetwork 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag16_I ~ Net‐work2Flag31_I

Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:Network1Flag32_I ~ Net‐work1Flag47_I Network 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag32_I ~ Net‐work2Flag47_I

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 41

Page 44: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag48_I ~ Net‐work1Flag63_I Network 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag48_I ~ Net‐work2Flag63_I

Ratio % % / 100 Signed Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Torque Limit % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned MUX1 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX2 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX3 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX4 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX5 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX6 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX7 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX8 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersPTD1 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD2 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD3 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD4 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteParallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned Node Count None None Unsigned Node Index None None Unsigned

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual42 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 45: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned Avg Ids Ref Amps / 10000 Unisgned

Modbus Communication4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 43

Page 46: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.4 Planning/ConfiguringThis section describes the setup methods available for communication.The following topics are explained:• Fast setup procedures• Network setup procedure• Network status detection• Setup procedure example

NoteFast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.

Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Modbus".2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC

controller.3. Set parameter 'Modbus Parity' (9047) to match the parity of the PLC controller.4. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.5. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive

01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in the following table.

6. Add the following line to the SOP: Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Table 4-22 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault resetNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

Network1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignment

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual44 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 47: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Bit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC sends 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value sets

bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

4.4.1 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedbackTo read status data from the drive, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Modbus".2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC

Controller.3. Set parameter 'Modbus Parity' (9047) to match the parity of the PLC controller.4. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.5. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.6. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from the drive.

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 45

Page 48: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the table General Status Bits (default definitions).

Table 4-23 General Status Bits (default definitions) TableBit Number Meaning in Drive Control Software Value0 Fault 0 = False

1 = True1 Alarm2 RunningForward3 RunningReverse4 DriveReady5 StartStopControlFromNetwork6 SpeedFromNetwork7 AtSpeedReference8 SpeedInPercent9 SpeedInRPM10 SpeedInHz11 Reserved for future use12 Reserved for future use13 Reserved for future use14 Reserved for future use15 Reserved for future use

NoteYou cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.

4.4.2 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the driveFollow the steps below to send a motor speed setting to the drive.1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,

to one of the following options:– %– RPM– Hertz

2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register "Data to Drive 02'. This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01'. The motor now accepts the speed setting from the PLC.

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual46 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 49: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.4.3 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOPTo control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at register 'Data to Drive 01'.

NoteThe 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default configuration is used or not.You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.

To control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Modbus".2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC

controller.3. Set parameter 'Modbus Parity' (9047) to match the parity of the PLC controller.4. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.5. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP".

This makes the definitions of the fixed register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.

6. Set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick-list variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.

7. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;

4.4.4 Network SetupAccess is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access Configure Parameters Menu (9902) parameters.Refer to the NXGPro+ Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels and codes.

NoteSetup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu of the Communications Menu (9).

Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the menus needed to complete setup.

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 47

Page 50: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network Set-up Procedure1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Modbus" and press

[ENTER]. The Modbus™ configuration parameters are viewable.2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC

controller.3. Set parameter 'Modbus Parity' (9047) to match the parity of the PLC controller.4. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.5. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor commanded

speed and motor feedback speed scaling.6. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:

n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %:7. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.8. Use table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to program the drive to send data to and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses that provide basic drive send and receive functionality. These are not changeable.

9. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:– For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually

enter a variable that is not included in the pick-lists, using the output data ID number. – Use the corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.

NoteThe output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.

– Custom program using the drives's SOP. Refer to section Sofware Programming for details.NoteThe PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the SOP.

Set Flags in the SOP for Drive Control through a NetworkEnsure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following

network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP: Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual48 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 51: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4.4.5 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC)TaskSet up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:• General Status• Motor speed• Output Power• Number of Active Faults

Procedure (Task Example)Refer to table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to establish whether an address or register is changeable.• General Status and Motor Speed Indication: 1. "Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicated general status.

Action: No action is required.2. 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed.

Action: No action is required.3. 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate output power4. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9403.5. Choose 'output power' from the pick-list.

Action: Output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.

• Number of Active Faults Indication1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate the number of active faults.2. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9404.

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 49

Page 52: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. The pick-list of data from drive variables appears. A 'number of active faults' is not an option displayed in the pick-list.Action: Manually specify the number of active faults.Refer to table Data From Drive-Pick List Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.

4. Refer to appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables.Actions: – Determine its data ID number (3000).– Use the arrow or number keys to enter 3000 and press [ENTER].

The display now shows "ManId-3000". – The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'. – If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.

– Ensure that the data ID is correct.

Table 4-24 Table of Completed Settings for Given ExamplePLC Address or Register Data ScalingData from Drive 01 (not changeable) General Status 16 bitsData from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor Speed RPMData from Drive 03 Output Power kWData from Drive 04 Number of Faults 0 to 128

4.4.6 Network Status (Pulse Timeout)Network Status (Pulse Timeout)A SOP flag is available to show the network status:• For network 1: Network1CommOk_I • For network 2: Network2CommOk_IThe SOP flag sets to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0" (false) when it is not operating normally.The network status cannot be automatically detected. Instead, a "Pulse Timeout" method is used to set the network status flags. The "Pulse Timeout" status detection must be set up in the menu system. It must be 'strobed' by a network device that is communicating with the drive.

Pulse Timeout Setup Procedure1. Choose one of the 62 selectable "Data to Drive" registers.2. Select the pick-list item to "Net Input Pulse".3. Set the parameter 'Network Timeout' (9934) for network 1 in the 'Config Parameters' menu

to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0 seconds = disable timeout.4. Set the parameter 'Network Timeout' (9935) for network 2 in the 'Config Parameters' menu

to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0 seconds = disable timeout.

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual50 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 53: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pulse Timeout Operation• A network device must be set to a unique (different) value into the "Net Input Pulse" register

before an internal timer reaches the "Network Timeout" value.• If the network device writes a unique value, the network status flag sets to "1" and the internal

timer is reset.• If the network device fails to write a unique value to the "Net Input Pulse" register before the

internal timer times to the value set by the "Network Timeout" parameter, then the status flag sets to "0".

4.4.7 Supported Modbus Command SetSupported Command SetThe Anybus Modbus module suuports the following Modbus™ commands: • Read holding registers (function code 0x03)• Write single register (function code 0x06)• Write multiple registers (function code 0x10)

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 51

Page 54: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Modbus Communication4.4 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual52 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 55: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Modbus Ethernet Communication 55.1 Modbus Ethernet Description

This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive that uses a PLC over a Modbus™ Ethernet network. This chapter addresses the following topics:• Description of the interface• User Programming• Parameter assignment and addressing• Configuration and setup options• Available functions

DescriptionThe Modbus™ Ethernet communication interface is based on the TCP/IP protocol. All addressing is based on IP addresses.The drive always acts as a Modbus™ server. This means that the drive does not initiate dialog on the Modbus™ Ethernet network. Rather, it listens to and then responds to the Modbus™ Ethernet client.

NoteOnly register-based read and write functions of the Modbus™ protocol are supported. These functions are used to monitor and control analog and digital inputs and outputs of the drive. Only the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) format of the Modbus™ protocol is supported by the NXGPro+ Control. All requests are sent via register port 502.Refer to section Functions for function codes supported by the NXGPro+ Control.

To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ Modbus Ethernet module.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 53

Page 56: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

5.2 AnyBus Ethernet Modbus Module

DescriptionThe following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ Ethernet Modbus™ module.

Status IndicatorsThe following figure shows the status indicators.

Figure 5-1 Anybus Ethernet Module Status IndicatorsRefer to the following tables to view explainations of the network status LED, module status LED, and the link / activity status LED.

Table 5-1 Network Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff No IP address or in state "EXCEPTION"Green At least one Modbus message receivedGreen, flashing Waiting for first Modbus messageRed IP address conflict detected, "FATAL ERROR"Red, flashing Connection timeout. No Modbus message has been received

within the configured "process active timeout" time1 Item 1 in figure Anybus Ethernet Module Status Indicators

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.2 AnyBus Ethernet Modbus Module

NXGPro+ Communication Manual54 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 57: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 5-2 Module Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff No powerGreen Controlled by a scanner in "Run State"Green, flashing Not configured, or scanner in "Idle State"Red Major fault ("EXCEPTION State", "FATAL Error", etc.)Red, flashing Recoverable Fault(s) Module is configured, but stored param‐

eters differ from currently used parameters1 Item 2 in figure Anybus Ethernet Module Status Indicators

Table 5-3 Link / Activity Status LED1 Led State DescriptionOff No link, no activityGreen Link ( 10 Mbit / s) establishedGreen, flashing Activity ( 10 Mbit / s)Red Link ( 10 Mbit / s) establishedRed, flashing Activity ( 10 Mbit / s)

1 Items 3 and 4 in figure Anybus Ethernet Module Status Indicators

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.2 AnyBus Ethernet Modbus Module

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 55

Page 58: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

5.3 Software Programming

5.3.1 Section OverviewThis section provides details for user programming through the SOP. The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition of the bits, complete the steps as described.1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits

controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup for

– programmable inputs to the drive– programmable outputs from the drive

The table Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits available for use in the SOP (Drctry.plus bits).

Table 5-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register BitsPick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Corresponding Drctry.plus bits Modbus Address

Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1Fixe‐dRegBit15_I

41025

Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1Fixe‐dRegBit15_I

41026

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual56 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 59: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Programming Procedure1. Enter parameter ID (9603).

– The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive pick list variables.

– Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

– the corresponding bits from the Drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below::Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit:Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bitRunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

2. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on for each subsequent set of 16 bits.Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in

register 'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

5.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.It can be seen that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive pick list variables.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 57

Page 60: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.The corresponding bits from the drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit.RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

4. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on in the same manner for the next set of 16 bits.

Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 5-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_INet Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I

The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 5-6 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual58 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 61: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium voltage:• The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using

the procedure described in the previous paragraphs.• The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the

following SOP source code:;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;

• The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input medium voltage trip.

5.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the Drive

DescriptionThere are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register 'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).

2. Enter parameter ID (9403). 3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List

Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list variables.

4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on. The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 5-7 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 59

Page 62: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O

Table 5-8 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input medium voltage:• The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using

the procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following

SOP source code:;Monitor medium volage fault on the Modbus networkNetwork1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;

• This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.

• The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a medium voltage fault occurred.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual60 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 63: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

5.4.1 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configurationFast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an

existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'.

Refer to tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration.

3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. Refer to tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration.

4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive ' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in the "Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table"

5. Add the following line to the SOP: Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Table 5-9 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault resetNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

Network1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignment

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 61

Page 64: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Bit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC sends 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value sets

bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

5.4.2 Parameter Assignment Addressing preludeThis section provides the following information for communication configuration and programming:• Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address• Parameter tables:

– Network configuration parameters– Network 1 configuration parameters– Network 2 configuration parameters

• Pick-list variable tables:– Data from Drive variables– Data to Drive variables

5.4.3 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (G28, G38)

The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Modbus™ addresses. The following data is provided:• Parameter ID

The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.• Modbus™ Address

A digital location provided by the Modbus™ Protocol, which stores values for use by the controller (PLC) and node (Siemens drive) devices. To establish functional communication between the PLC and the drive via the drive's Modbus™ connection, the control software in the drive must be configured to know what certain addresses are used for.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual62 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 65: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

• Data From DriveData that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track any of a number of drive status choices.

• Data To DriveData that the PLC will send to the drive to control it. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control any of a number of drive function choices.

Table 5-10 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus AddressNetwork Parameter

IDDescription Default Con‐

tents Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set One

Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set Two

1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status(not changea‐ble)

40257 40001

1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changea‐ble)

40258 40002

1 9403 to 9464

Data From Drive 03 to 64

None 40259 to 40320 40003 to 40064

1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changea‐ble)

40001 40065

1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity De‐mand (not changea‐ble)

40002 40066

1 9603 to 9664

Data To Drive 03 to 64

None 40003 to 40064 440067 to 40128

2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status(not changea‐ble)

40257 40001

2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changea‐ble)

40258 40002

2 9503 to 9564

Data From Drive 03 to 64

None 40259 to 40320 40003 to 40064

2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable)

40001 40065

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 63

Page 66: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network Parameter ID

Description Default Con‐tents

Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set One

Modbus Address for Regis‐ter Set Two

2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity De‐mand(not changea‐ble)

40002 40066

2 9703 to 9764

Data To Drive 03 to 64

None 40003 to 40064 40067 to 40128

5.4.4 Network Control Menu

Network Parameters

Table 5-11 Network Control Menu (9943)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net Control Type 9944 SOP Set bit definition:

• SOP• Fixed

Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:• Maintained• Momentary

Table 5-12 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2

registers.

Network 1 Parameters

Table 5-13 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to

the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet• Ethernet I/P

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual64 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 67: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 5-14 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:

• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network Timeout 9934 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-re‐sponsive.

IP Address 9960 172.16.20.18

Set the system TCP-IP address.

Subnet Mask 9961 255.255.0.0

Set the system TCP-IP subnet mask.

Gateway Address 9962 172.17.1.1

Set the system TCP-IP gateway address.

Table 5-15 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to

9464 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 5-16 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg

Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to

9664 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 65

Page 68: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network 2 Parameters

Table 5-17 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Ma

x Description

Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet • Ethernet I/P

Table 5-18 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Velocity Units 9924 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:

• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the net‐work.

Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network Timeout 9935 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-re‐sponsive.

IP Address 9936 172.16.20.17

Set the system TCP-IP address.

Subnet Mask 9937 255.255.0.0

Set the system TCP-IP subnet mask.

Gateway Address 9938 172.17.1.1

Set the system TCP-IP address gateway address.

Table 5-19 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to

9564 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual66 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 69: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 5-20 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to

9764 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

5.4.5 Pick-list Variable Tables

Table 5-21 Data from Drive Pick-list VariablesName Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNone None None None None NoneMan Id None None None None Refer to appendix Internal Drive Net‐

workGeneral Status 2001 None None Bit Field • Bit 0: Fault

• Bit 1: Alarm• Bit 2: Running Forward • Bit 3: Running Reverse • Bit 4: Drive Ready • Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Net‐

work • Bit 6: Speed Reference From Net‐

work • Bit 7: At Speed Reference • Bit 8: Speed In Percent • Bit 9: Speed In RPM• Bit 10: Speed In Hz• Bit 11: Reserved for future use • Bit 12: Reserved for future use • Bit 13: Reserved for future use • Bit 14: Reserved for future use • Bit 15: Reserved for future use

Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed Motor Speed 2014 %

RPMHz

/10/1/10

Unsigned

Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 67

Page 70: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesHeartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecondDrive State 2210 None None Unsigned • 0 = Off

• 1 = Magnetizing• 2 = Spinning Load• 3 = Autotune• 4 = Run• 5 = Stop• 6 = Coast• 7 = Up Transfer• 8 = Down Transfer

Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Net‐

work1Flag15_INet1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Net‐

work1Flag31_INet1 Out Reg 3 2004 Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Net‐

work1Flag37_INet1 Out Reg 4 2005 Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Net‐

work1Flag63_INet2 Out Reg 1 2006 Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Net‐

work2Flag15_INet2 Out Reg 2 2007 Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Net‐

work2Flag31_INet2 Out Reg 3 2008 Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Net‐

work2Flag37_INet2 Out Reg 4 2009 Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Net‐

work2Flag63_ITorque Current 2150 Amps Unsigned Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps Unsigned Motor Flux 2015 % Unsigned Motor Torque 2160 % Unsigned Flux Reference 2011 % Unsigned Input Voltage 2120 Volts Unsigned Inp Power Factor 2012 % Unsigned Input KVars 2013 KVAR Unsigned Max Available Out‐put

2016 Volts /1 Unsigned

Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest CellMux1 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux1 Data None None None None Refer to appendixMultiplexer (MUX)

Data Registers

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual68 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 71: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesMux2 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux7 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersWAGO Inputs 1 -16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - External‐

DigitalInput01h_IExternalDigitalInput02a_I - External‐DigitalInput02h_I

WAGO Inputs 17 - 32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - External‐DigitalInput03h_IExternalDigitalInput04a_I - External‐DigitalInput04h_I

WAGO Inputs 33 - 48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - External‐DigitalInput05h_IExternalDigitalInput06a_I - External‐DigitalInput06h_I

WAGO Inputs 49 - 64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - External‐DigitalInput07h_IExternalDigitalInput08a_I - External‐DigitalInput08h_I

WAGO Inputs 65 - 80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - External‐DigitalInput09h_IExternalDigitalInput10a_I - External‐DigitalInput10h_I

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 69

Page 72: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesWAGO Inputs 81 - 96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - External‐

DigitalInput11h_IExternalDigitalInput12a_I - External‐DigitalInput12h_I

WAGO Outputs 1 - 16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput01h_OExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput02h_O

WAGO Outputs 17 - 32

2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput03h_OExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput04h_O

WAGO Outputs 33 - 48

2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput05h_OExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput06h_O

WAGO Outputs 49 - 64

2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput07h_OExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput08h_O

PFD1 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD2 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD3 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD4 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Drive Losses 2161 % / 100 Unsigned Excessive Reactive Current

2162 & / 100 Unsigned

Speed Droop Percent 2163 & / 100 Unsigned Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 & / 100 Unsigned Avail Reactive Cur‐rent

2653 % / 100 Unsigned

Drive Efficiency 2168 % / 100 Unsigned Ids Ref Current 2276 % / 100 Unsigned

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual70 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 73: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

5.4.6 Data-to-Drive Pick-list VariablesRefer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Table 5-22 Data-to-Drive Pick-listName None None None None NoneFixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field • When parameter 'Net Control

Type' (9945) is set to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control drive functions.

• When parameter 'Net Control ' (9945) is set to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the control software:– Bit 0: Run Forward– Bit 1: Run Reverse– Bit 2: Fault Reset– Bit 3: Stop– Bit 4: Reserved– Bit 5: Start / Stop Control

from Network– Bit 6: Speed Command

from Network– Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for fu‐

ture assignmentVelocity Demand

Hz / 10 Signed Speed DemandRPM 1% / 10

Auxiliary Demand Hz / 10 Signed Auxiliary Speed Demand RPM 1 % / 10Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag0_I ~ Net‐work1Flag15_INetwork 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag0_I ~ Net‐work2Flag15_I

Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags: Network1Flag16_I ~ Net‐work1Flag31_INetwork 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag16_I ~ Net‐work2Flag31_I

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 71

Page 74: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag32_I ~ Net‐work1Flag47_I Network 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag32_I ~ Net‐work2Flag47_I

Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:Network1Flag48_I ~ Net‐work1Flag63_I Network 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag48_I ~ Net‐work2Flag63_I

Ratio % % / 100 Signed Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Torque Limit % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned MUX1 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX2 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX3 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX4 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX5 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX6 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX7 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX8 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersPTD1 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD2 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD3 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD4 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteParallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual72 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 75: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned Node Count None None Unsigned Node Index None None Unsigned Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned Avg Ids Ref Amps / 10000 Unsigned

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 73

Page 76: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

5.5 Planning/ConfiguringThis section describes the setup methods available for communication.The following topics are explained:• Fast setup procedures• Network setup procedure• Network status detection• Setup procedure example

NoteFast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.

5.5.1 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configurationFast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an

existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'.

Refer to tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration.

3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. Refer to tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration.

4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive ' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in the "Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table"

5. Add the following line to the SOP: Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual74 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 77: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 5-23 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault resetNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

Network1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC sends 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value sets

bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

5.5.2 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedbackProcedureTo read status data from the drive, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'.

To find the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to the table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

3. Set parameter 'IP Address'.The IP address must be unique to the drive.To find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menus located in the previous section of this chapter.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 75

Page 78: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.5. Refer to the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to obtain the addresses for general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from the drive.

The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the "General Status Bits (default definitions) Table".

Table 5-24 General Status Bits (default definitions) TableBit Number Meaning in Drive Control Software Value0 Fault 0 = False

1 = True1 Alarm2 RunningForward3 RunningReverse4 DriveReady5 StartStopControlFromNetwork6 SpeedFromNetwork7 AtSpeedReference8 SpeedInPercent9 SpeedInRPM10 SpeedInHz11 Reserved for future use12 Reserved for future use13 Reserved for future use14 Reserved for future use15 Reserved for future use

NoteYou cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.

5.5.3 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOPTo control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at register 'Data to Drive 01'.

NoteThe 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default configuration is used or not.You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual76 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 79: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

To control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet IP".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'. To find

the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to the table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. To find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menus located in the previous section of this chapter.

4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP".This makes the definitions of the fixed register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.

5. Set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP.Refer to section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick-list variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.

6. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;

5.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the driveFollow the steps below to send a motor speed setting to the drive.1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,

to one of the following options:– %– RPM– Hertz

2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register "Data to Drive 02'. This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01'. The motor now accepts the speed setting from the PLC.

5.5.5 Network SetupAccess is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access Configure Parameters Menu (9902) parameters.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 77

Page 80: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Refer to the NXGPro+ Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels and codes.

NoteSetup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu of the Communications Menu (9).

Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the menus needed to complete setup.

Network Set-up Procedure1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Ethernet Modbus" and

press [ENTER]. The configuration parameters are viewable.2. Set parameter 'IP Address'.

The IP address must be unique to the drive. To find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware refer to the table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

3. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'.To find the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration refer to the table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.

5. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %:

6. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual78 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 81: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7. Use table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to program the drive to send data to and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses that provide basic drive send and receive functionality. These are not changeable.

8. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:– For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually. – Enter a variable that is not included in the pick-lists, using the output data ID number. Use

the list of data IDs available in appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable. Use the corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.NoteThe output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.

– Enter from a choice of variables in the pick-lists. The pick-lists in the menus contain the most commonly used data variables. Refer to section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the pick-lists.NoteA pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.

– Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to section Software Programming for details.NoteThe PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOPOnly if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the SOP.

Set Flags in the SOP for Drive Control through a NetworkEnsure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following

network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP: Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;

5.5.6 Network Status DetectionNetwork Status (Pulse Timeout)A SOP flag is available to show the network status:• For network 1: Network1CommOk_I • For network 2: Network2CommOk_I

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 79

Page 82: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The SOP flag sets to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0" (false) when it is not operating normally.The network status cannot be automatically detected. Instead, a "Pulse Timeout" method is used to set the network status flags. The "Pulse Timeout" status detection must be set up in the menu system. It must be 'strobed' by a network device that is communicating with the drive.

Pulse Timeout Setup Procedure1. Choose one of the 62 selectable "Data to Drive" registers.2. Select the pick-list item to "Net Input Pulse".3. Set the parameter 'Network Timeout' (9934) for network 1 in the 'Config Parameters' menu

to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0 seconds = disable timeout.4. Set the parameter 'Network Timeout' (9935) for network 2 in the 'Config Parameters' menu

to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0 seconds = disable timeout.

Pulse Timeout Operation• A network device must be set to a unique (different) value into the "Net Input Pulse" register

before an internal timer reaches the "Network Timeout" value.• If the network device writes a unique value, the network status flag sets to "1" and the internal

timer is reset.• If the network device fails to write a unique value to the "Net Input Pulse" register before the

internal timer times to the value set by the "Network Timeout" parameter, then the status flag sets to "0".

Modbus Ethernet Communication5.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual80 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 83: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Ethernet / IP Communication 66.1 Ethernet / IP Description

DescriptionThis chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive by using a PLC over an Ethernet / IP network. It addresses the following topics:• Description of the interface• User Programming• Parameter assignment and addressing• Configuration and setup options• Available functionsThe Ethernet / IP communication interface is based on the TCP / IP protocol. All addressing is based on IP addresses.The drive always acts as a server. This means that the drive does not initiate dialog on the Ethernet network. Rather, it listens to and then responds to the Ethernet / IP client.The following information provides an overview of the Anybus™ Ethernet module which:• acts as a Group 2 and 3 server on an Ethernet / IP network. Ethernet I/P is based on the

Common Industrial Protocol (CIP)• is configured as a communication adapter (Profile 12)• uses Assembly #150 for O→T data (data sent to the NXGPro+ Control)• uses Assembly #100 for T→O data (data sent from the NXGPro+ Control)• supports input and output data sizes of 2 to 128 bytes• has an RJ45 for connection to a network

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 81

Page 84: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6.2 AnyBus Ethernet / IP Module

DescriptionThe Anybus Ethernet / IP module supports Ethernet / IP communication. The module plugs into the Network 1 connector or the Network 2 connector on the NXGPro+ DCR, as shown in figure NXGPro+ Control in the Introduction chapter.The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ Ethernet/IP Modbus™ module.

Status IndicatorsThe following figure shows the status indicators.

Figure 6-1 Ethernet/IP Commuication Connector Status Indicator LocationsRefer to the following tables to view explainations of the network status LED, module status LED, and the link / activity status LED.

Table 6-1 Network Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff No power or no IP addressGreen Online, one or more connections established (CIP Class 1 or 3)Green, flashing Online, no connections establishedRed, flashing once Duplicate IP address, FATAL error Red, flashing twice One or more connections times out (CIP Class 1 or 3)

1 Item 1 in figure Ethernet/IP Commuication Connector Status Indicator Locations

Ethernet / IP Communication6.2 AnyBus Ethernet / IP Module

NXGPro+ Communication Manual82 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 85: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 6-2 Module Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff No PowerGreen Controlled by a Scanner in Run stateGreen, flashing Not configured, or Scanner in Idle stateRed Major Fault (EXCEPTION state, Fatal error, etc.)Red, flashing Recoverable fault(s); Module is configured, but stored param‐

eters differ from currently used parameters1 Item 2 in figure Ethernet/IP Commuication Connector Status Indicator Locations

Table 6-3 Link / Activity Status LED1 Led State DescriptionOff No link, no activityGreen Link (100 Mbit / s) establishedGreen, flickering Activity (100 Mbit / s)Yellow Link (10 Mbit / s) establishedYellow, flickering Activity (10 Mbit / s)

1 Items 3 and 4 in figure Ethernet/IP Commuication Connector Status Indicator Locations

Ethernet / IP Communication6.2 AnyBus Ethernet / IP Module

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 83

Page 86: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6.3 Software Programming

6.3.1 Section OverviewThis section provides details for user programming through the SOP. The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition of the bits, complete the steps as described.1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits

controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup for

– programmable inputs to the drive– programmable outputs from the drive

Table Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits available for use in the SOP (Drctry.plus bits).

Table 6-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register BitsPick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.plus bitsFixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_IFixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_I

6.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the drive

DescriptionThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603). 3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List

Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive pick list variables.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual84 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 87: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bitRunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1,stop using bit 0

5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.NoteBy choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register 'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive. To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 6-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.plus bits Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I

Table 6-6 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.plus bits Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I

Ethernet / IP Communication6.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 85

Page 88: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium voltage:• The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using

the procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the

following SOP source code:– ;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input

medium voltage– ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;

• The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input medium voltage trip.

6.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the drive

DescriptionThere are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment / Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register 'Data from Drive 03' which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).

2. Enter parameter ID (9403). 3. The pick-list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data from Drive Pick List

Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data from drive pick-list variables.

4. Scroll through the pick-list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on. The pick-list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 6-7 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O

Ethernet / IP Communication6.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual86 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 89: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O

Table 6-8 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input medium voltage:• The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using

the procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following

SOP source code:; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus networkNetwork1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;

• This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.

• The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a medium voltage fault occured.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 87

Page 90: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

6.4.1 Parameter Assignment / Addressing PreludeThis section provides the following information for communication configuration and programming:• Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address• Parameter tables:

Network configuration parametersNetwork 1 configuration parametersNetwork 2 configuration parameters

• Pick-list variables:Data from Drive variablesData to Drive variables (with scaling and range)

6.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address

The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Modbus™ addresses. The following data is provided:• Parameter ID

The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.• Data From Drive

Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track any of a number of drive status choices.

• Data To DriveData that the PLC will send to the drive to control it. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control any of a number of drive function choices.

Table 6-9 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus AddressNetwork Parameter ID Description Default Contents 1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changeable) 1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) 1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable) 1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual88 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 91: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents 2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changeable) 2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) 2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable) 2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None

6.4.3 Parameter Tables

Network Parameters

Table 6-10 Network Control Menu (9943)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net Control Type 9944 Sop Set bit definition:

• SOP• Fixed

Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:• Maintained• Momentary

Table 6-11 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2

registers.

Network 1 Parameters

Table 6-12 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to

the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet • Ethernet I/P

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 89

Page 92: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 6-13 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from

the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand ref‐erence from the network.

IP Address 9960 172.16.20.18 Set the system TCP/IP address.Subnet Mask 9961 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.Gateway Address 9962 172.17.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.

Table 6-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to

9464 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 6-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to

9664 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual90 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 93: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network 2 Parameters

Table 6-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Ma

x Description

Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet• Ethernet I/P

Table 6-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Velocity Units 9924 Designate the units for velocity values

from the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network Timeout 9935 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-responsive.

IP Address 9936 172.16.20.17 Set the system TCP/IP address.Subnet Mask 9937 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.Gateway Address 9938 172.17.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.

Table 6-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to

9564 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 91

Page 94: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 6-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to

9764 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

6.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables

Table 6-20 Data from Drive Pick-list VariablesName Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNone None None None None NoneMan Id None None None None Refer to appendix Internal Drive Net‐

workGeneral Status 2001 None None Bit Field • Bit 0: Fault

• Bit 1: Alarm• Bit 2: Running Forward • Bit 3: Running Reverse • Bit 4: Drive Ready • Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Net‐

work • Bit 6: Speed Reference From Net‐

work • Bit 7: At Speed Reference • Bit 8: Speed In Percent • Bit 9: Speed In RPM• Bit 10: Speed In Hz• Bit 11: Reserved for future use • Bit 12: Reserved for future use • Bit 13: Reserved for future use • Bit 14: Reserved for future use • Bit 15: Reserved for future use

Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed Motor Speed 2014 %

RPMHz

/10/1/10

Unsigned

Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual92 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 95: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesHeartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecondDrive State 2210 None None Unsigned • 0 = Off

• 1 = Magnetizing• 2 = Spinning Load• 3 = Autotune• 4 = Run• 5 = Stop• 6 = Coast• 7 = Up Transfer• 8 = Down Transfer

Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Net‐

work1Flag15_INet1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Net‐

work1Flag31_INet1 Out Reg 3 2004 Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Net‐

work1Flag37_INet1 Out Reg 4 2005 Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Net‐

work1Flag63_INet2 Out Reg 1 2006 Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Net‐

work2Flag15_INet2 Out Reg 2 2007 Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Net‐

work2Flag31_INet2 Out Reg 3 2008 Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Net‐

work2Flag37_INet2 Out Reg 4 2009 Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Net‐

work2Flag63_ITorque Current 2150 Amps Unsigned Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps Unsigned Motor Flux 2015 % Unsigned Motor Torque 2160 % Unsigned Flux Reference 2011 % Unsigned Input Voltage 2120 Volts Unsigned Inp Power Factor 2012 % Unsigned Input KVars 2013 KVAR Unsigned Max Available Out‐put

2016 Volts /1 Unsigned

Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest CellMux1 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux1 Data None None None None Refer to appendixMultiplexer (MUX)

Data Registers

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 93

Page 96: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesMux2 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux7 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersWAGO Inputs 1 -16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - External‐

DigitalInput01h_IExternalDigitalInput02a_I - External‐DigitalInput02h_I

WAGO Inputs 17 - 32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - External‐DigitalInput03h_IExternalDigitalInput04a_I - External‐DigitalInput04h_I

WAGO Inputs 33 - 48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - External‐DigitalInput05h_IExternalDigitalInput06a_I - External‐DigitalInput06h_I

WAGO Inputs 49 - 64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - External‐DigitalInput07h_IExternalDigitalInput08a_I - External‐DigitalInput08h_I

WAGO Inputs 65 - 80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - External‐DigitalInput09h_IExternalDigitalInput10a_I - External‐DigitalInput10h_I

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual94 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 97: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesWAGO Inputs 81 - 96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - External‐

DigitalInput11h_IExternalDigitalInput12a_I - External‐DigitalInput12h_I

WAGO Outputs 1 - 16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput01h_OExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput02h_O

WAGO Outputs 17 - 32

2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput03h_OExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput04h_O

WAGO Outputs 33 - 48

2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput05h_OExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput06h_O

WAGO Outputs 49 - 64

2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput07h_OExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput08h_O

PFD1 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD2 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD3 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD4 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Drive Losses 2161 % / 100 Unsigned Excessive Reactive Current

2162 & / 100 Unsigned

Speed Droop Percent 2163 & / 100 Unsigned Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 & / 100 Unsigned Avail Reactive Cur‐rent

2653 % / 100 Unsigned

Drive Efficiency 2168 % / 100 Unsigned Ids Ref Current 2276 % / 100 Unsigned

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 95

Page 98: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6.4.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list VariablesRefer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Table 6-21 Data-to-Drive Pick-listName None None None None NoneFixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field • When parameter 'Net Control

Type' (9945) is set to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control drive functions.

• When parameter 'Net Control Tyupe' (9945) is set to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as fol‐lows in the control software:– Bit 0: Run Forward– Bit 1: Run Reverse– Bit 2: Fault Reset– Bit 3: Stop– Bit 4: Reserved– Bit 5: Start / Stop Control

from Networkj– Bit 6: Spped Command

from Network– Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for fu‐

ture assignmentVelocity Demand

Hz / 10 Signed Speed DemandRPM 1% / 10

Auxiliary Demand Hz / 10 Signed Auxiliary Speed Demand RPM 1 % / 10Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag0_I ~ Net‐work1Flag15_INetwork 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag0_I ~ Net‐work2Flag15_I

Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags: Network1Flag16_I ~ Net‐work1Flag31_INetwork 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag16_I ~ Net‐work2Flag31_I

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual96 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 99: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag32_I ~ Net‐work1Flag47_I Network 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag32_I ~ Net‐work2Flag47_I

Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:Network1Flag48_I ~ Net‐work1Flag63_I Network 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag48_I ~ Net‐work2Flag63_I

Ratio % % / 100 Signed Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Torque Limit % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned MUX1 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX2 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX3 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX4 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX5 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX6 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX7 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX8 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersPTD1 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD2 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD3 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD4 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteParallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 97

Page 100: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned Node Count None None Unsigned Node Index None None Unsigned Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned Avg Ids Ref Amps / 10000 Unisgned

Ethernet / IP Communication6.4 Parameter Assignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual98 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 101: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6.5 Planning / Configuring

6.5.1 Planning Configuring IntroductionThis section describes the setup methods available for communication.The following topics are explained:• Fast setup procedures• Network setup procedure• Network status detection• Setup procedure example

NoteFast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.

6.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configurationFast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet IP".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'.

To find the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration refer to tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table.

4. Add the following line to the SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 99

Page 102: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 6-22 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault resetNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

Network1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary", otherwise this bit is reserved.

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value

sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

6.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedbackTo read status data from the drive, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet IP".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'.

To find the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to the table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

3. Set parameter 'IP Address'.The IP address must be unique to the drive.To find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menus located in the previous section of this chapter.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual100 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 103: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.5. Refer to the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to obtain the addresses for general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from the drive.

The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following table.

Table 6-23 General Status Bits (default definitions) TableBit Number Meaning in Drive Control Software Value0 Fault 0 = False

1 = True1 Alarm2 RunningForward3 RunningReverse4 DriveReady5 StartStopControlFromNetwork6 SpeedFromNetwork7 AtSpeedReference8 SpeedInPercent9 SpeedInRPM10 SpeedInHz11 Reserved for future use12 Reserved for future use13 Reserved for future use14 Reserved for future use15 Reserved for future use

NoteYou cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.

6.5.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOPTo control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at register 'Data to Drive 01'.

NoteThe 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default configuration is used or not.You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 101

Page 104: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

To control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet IP".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address'. To find

the parameter numbers for the 'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to the table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter.

3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. To find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on the NXGPro+ software version and hardware configuration, refer to table titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menus located in the previous section of this chapter.

4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP".This makes the definitions of the fixed register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.

5. Set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP.Refer to section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick-list variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.

6. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;

6.5.5 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the driveFollow the steps below to send a motor speed setting to the drive.1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,

to one of the following options:– %– RPM– Hertz

2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register "Data to Drive 02'. This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01'. The motor now accepts the speed setting from the PLC.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual102 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 105: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6.5.6 Setup ExampleTaskSet up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:• General Status• Motor speed• Output Power• Number of Active Faults

Procedure (Task Example)Refer to table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to establish whether an address or register is changeable.• General Status and Motor Speed Indication: 1. "Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicated general status.

Action: No action is required.2. 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed.

Action: No action is required.3. 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate output power4. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9403.5. Choose 'output power' from the pick-list.

Action: Output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.

• Number of Active Faults Indication1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate the number of active faults.2. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9404.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 103

Page 106: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. The pick-list of data from drive variables appears. A 'number of active faults' is not an option displayed in the pick-list.Action: Manually specify the number of active faults.Refer to table Data From Drive-Pick List Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.

4. Refer to appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables.Actions: – Determine its data ID number (3000).– Use the arrow or number keys to enter 3000 and press [ENTER].

The display now shows "ManId-3000". – The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'. – If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.

– Ensure that the data ID is correct.

Table 6-24 Table of Completed Settings for Given ExamplePLC Address or Register Data ScalingData from Drive 01 (not changeable) General Status 16 bitsData from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor Speed RPMData from Drive 03 Output Power kWData from Drive 04 Number of Faults 0 to 128

6.5.7 Network Status DetectionNetwork Status (Pulse Timeout)A SOP flag is available to show the network status:• For network 1: Network1CommOk_I • For network 2: Network2CommOk_IThe SOP flag sets to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0" (false) when it is not operating normally.The network status cannot be automatically detected. Instead, a "Pulse Timeout" method is used to set the network status flags. The "Pulse Timeout" status detection must be set up in the menu system. It must be 'strobed' by a network device that is communicating with the drive.

Pulse Timeout Setup Procedure1. Choose one of the 62 selectable "Data to Drive" registers.2. Select the pick-list item to "Net Input Pulse".3. Set the parameter 'Network Timeout' (9934) for network 1 in the 'Config Parameters' menu

to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0 seconds = disable timeout.4. Set the parameter 'Network Timeout' (9935) for network 2 in the 'Config Parameters' menu

to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0 seconds = disable timeout.

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual104 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 107: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pulse Timeout Operation• A network device must be set to a unique (different) value into the "Net Input Pulse" register

before an internal timer reaches the "Network Timeout" value.• If the network device writes a unique value, the network status flag sets to "1" and the internal

timer is reset.• If the network device fails to write a unique value to the "Net Input Pulse" register before the

internal timer times to the value set by the "Network Timeout" parameter, then the status flag sets to "0".

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 105

Page 108: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Ethernet / IP Communication6.5 Planning / Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual106 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 109: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Profibus Communication 77.1 Profibus Description

This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a Profibus™ network. It addresses the following topics:• Description of the interface• User programming• Parameter assignment and addressing• Configuration and setup options• Available functions

DescriptionThe drive supports Profibus™ communication via an Anybus™ Profibus™ module. Profibus™ communication functions in the following way: • Profibus™ is a token ring network.

Controller devices (or active stations) are those devices that initiate communication. When a controller receives the "token" it may then perform controller-node communications with its nodes (or passive stations).

• The drive acts as a node (passive station) on the Profibus™ network. The drive auto detects the baud rate from the network.

• The Anybus™ module has a 9 pin DB-9F connector. Pin 3 is the positive data pin (RxD/TxD-P) and pin 8 is the negative connection (RxD/TxD-N). The modules support the following baud rates:– 9.6 kbit/sec– 19.2 kbit/sec– 93.75 kbit/sec– 187.5 kbit/sec – 500 kbit/sec– 1.5 Mbit/sec – 3 Mbit/sec– 6 Mbit/sec – 12 Mbit/sec.

Profibus is a trademark of the Profibus Trade Organization. To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ Profibus™ module.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 107

Page 110: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.2 AnyBus Profibus Modbus Module

DescriptionThe Anybus Profibus Modbus™ module supports Profibus communication. The module plugs into the Network 1 connector or the Network 2 connector on the NXGPro+ DCR, as shown in figure NXGPro+ Control in the Introduction chapter.The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ Profibus Modbus™ module.

Status IndicatorsThe following figure shows the status indicators.

Figure 7-1 Anybus Profibus M40 AB6600 with logo① Operation Mode LED State② Module Status LED State③ Profibus Connector

Refer to the following tables to view explainations of the operation mode status LED and module status LED.

Table 7-1 Operation Mode LED1 LED State DescriptionOff Not online / No powerGreen Online, data exchange

Profibus Communication 7.2 AnyBus Profibus Modbus Module

NXGPro+ Communication Manual108 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 111: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

LED State DescriptionGreen, flashing Online, clearRed, flashing once Parameterization error Red, flashing twice Profibus configuration error

1 Item 1 in figure Profibus Communication Module Status Indicator Locations

Table 7-2 Module Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff Not initializedGreen InitializedGreen, flashing Initialized, diagnostic event(s) presentRed Exception error

1 Item 2 in figure Profibus Communication Module Status Indicator Locations

Table 7-3 Profibus Connector 1

Pin Signal Description1 - 2 - 3 B line Positive RxD/TxD, RS485 level4 RTS 5 GND Bus 6 +5 V Bus Output 7 - 8 A Line Negative RxD/TxD, RS485 level9 - Housing Cable Shield

1 Item 3 in figure Profibus Communication Module Status Indicators

Profibus Communication 7.2 AnyBus Profibus Modbus Module

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 109

Page 112: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.3 Software Programming

7.3.1 Section OverviewThis section provides details for user programming through the SOP. The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition of the bits, complete the steps as described.1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits

controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup for

– programmable inputs to the drive– programmable outputs from the drive

The table Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits available for use in the SOP (Drctry.plus bits).

Table 7-4 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register BitsPick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.plus bitsFixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_IFixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_I

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Profibus Communication 7.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual110 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 113: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).– The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List

Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive pick-list variables.

– Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

– the corresponding bits from the Drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below::Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit:Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bitRunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

3. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on for each subsequent set of 16 bits.Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

7.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.It can be seen that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive pick list variables.

Profibus Communication 7.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 111

Page 114: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.The corresponding bits from the drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit.RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

4. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on in the same manner for the next set of 16 bits.

Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 7-5 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_INet Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I

Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I

Profibus Communication 7.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual112 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 115: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium voltage:• The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using

the procedure described in the previous paragraphs.• The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the

following SOP source code:;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;

• The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input medium voltage trip.

7.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the drive

DescriptionThere are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register 'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).

2. Enter parameter ID (9403). 3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List

Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list variables.

4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on. The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) and Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 7-6 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O

Profibus Communication 7.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 113

Page 116: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O

Table 7-7 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input medium voltage:• The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using

the procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following

SOP source code:

Table 7-8 SOP Source Code - (setting flag to correspond to medium voltage low fault); Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus networkNetwork1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;

• This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.

• The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a medium voltage fault occurred.

Profibus Communication 7.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual114 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 117: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

7.4.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing preludeThis section provides the following information for communication configuration and programming:• Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address• Parameter tables:

– Network configuration parameters– Network 1 configuration parameters– Network 2 configuration parameters

• Pick-list variable tables:– Data from Drive variables– Data to Drive variables (with scaling and range)

7.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address

The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding register addresses. The following data is provided:• Parameter ID

The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.• Profibus™ Network Data

Profibus™ uses a pre-defined byte count to communicate between the controller and the drive.– The drive uses up to 136 bytes for input and output; 128 bytes are used to form the 6416-

bit registers (2 bytes per register); and 8 bytes are ‘reserved’ for future use.– The data received (128 bytes) is mapped to the 64 data to drive registers and the data sent

to the PLC is defined using the 64 data from drive registers.– Network data size may be limited to 16, 32, 64, 96, 128, or 136 bytes for input and output

using parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network 2 I/O Size' (9952). At 136 bytes, only 128 are available to the user. You must configure the Profibus™ controller to have the same quantity of bytes.

– Each network register is 16 bits (2 bytes). The order of the bytes can be swapped to match the network data format (9953, 9954).

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 115

Page 118: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

• Data From DriveData that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track any of a number of drive status choices.

• Data To DriveData that the PLC will send to the drive to control it. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control any of a number of drive function choices.

Table 7-9 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus AddressNetwork Parameter ID Description Default Contents 1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status

(not changeable) 1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed

(not changeable) 1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits

(not changeable) 1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand

(not changeable)1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None 2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status

(not changeable) 2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed

(not changeable) 2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable) 2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand

(not changeable)2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual116 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 119: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.4.3 Parameter Tables

Network Parameters

Table 7-10 Network Control Menu (9943)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net Control Type 9944 SOP Set bit definition:

• SOP• Fixed

Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:• Maintained• Momentary

Table 7-11 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2

registers.

Network 1 Parameters

Table 7-12 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to

the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet • Ethernet I/P

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 117

Page 120: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 7-13 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Profibus™ Address 9904 2 2 124 Set the address of the node on the Profibus™

network.Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from

the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand ref‐erence from the network.

Network 1 I/O Size 9951 136 Select the number of input and output data bytes.

Net 1 Swap Bytes 9953 Off Swap register byte order:• Off• On

Table 7-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to

9464 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 7-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to

9664 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual118 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 121: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network 2 Parameters

Table 7-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Ma

x Description

Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet• Ethernet I/P

Table 7-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Profibus™ Address 9918 2 2 124 Set the address of the node on the Profi‐

bus™ network.Velocity Units 9924 Designate the units for velocity values

from the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network 2 I/O Size 9952 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output da‐ta bytes.

Net 2 Swap Bytes 9954 Off Swap register byte order:• Off• On

Table 7-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to

9564 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 119

Page 122: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 7-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to

9764 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

7.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables

Table 7-20 Data from Drive Pick-list VariablesName Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNone None None None None NoneMan Id None None None None Refer to appendix Internal Drive Net‐

workGeneral Status 2001 None None Bit Field • Bit 0: Fault

• Bit 1: Alarm• Bit 2: Running Forward • Bit 3: Running Reverse • Bit 4: Drive Ready • Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Net‐

work • Bit 6: Speed Reference From Net‐

work • Bit 7: At Speed Reference • Bit 8: Speed In Percent • Bit 9: Speed In RPM• Bit 10: Speed In Hz• Bit 11: Reserved for future use • Bit 12: Reserved for future use • Bit 13: Reserved for future use • Bit 14: Reserved for future use • Bit 15: Reserved for future use

Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed Motor Speed 2014 %

RPMHz

/10/1/10

Unsigned

Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual120 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 123: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesHeartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecondDrive State 2210 None None Unsigned • 0 = Off

• 1 = Magnetizing• 2 = Spinning Load• 3 = Autotune• 4 = Run• 5 = Stop• 6 = Coast• 7 = Up Transfer• 8 = Down Transfer

Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Net‐

work1Flag15_INet1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Net‐

work1Flag31_INet1 Out Reg 3 2004 Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Net‐

work1Flag37_INet1 Out Reg 4 2005 Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Net‐

work1Flag63_INet2 Out Reg 1 2006 Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Net‐

work2Flag15_INet2 Out Reg 2 2007 Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Net‐

work2Flag31_INet2 Out Reg 3 2008 Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Net‐

work2Flag37_INet2 Out Reg 4 2009 Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Net‐

work2Flag63_ITorque Current 2150 Amps Unsigned Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps Unsigned Motor Flux 2015 % Unsigned Motor Torque 2160 % Unsigned Flux Reference 2011 % Unsigned Input Voltage 2120 Volts Unsigned Inp Power Factor 2012 % Unsigned Input KVars 2013 KVAR Unsigned Max Available Out‐put

2016 Volts /1 Unsigned

Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest CellMux1 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux1 Data None None None None Refer to appendixMultiplexer (MUX)

Data Registers

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 121

Page 124: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesMux2 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux7 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersWAGO Inputs 1 -16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - External‐

DigitalInput01h_IExternalDigitalInput02a_I - External‐DigitalInput02h_I

WAGO Inputs 17 - 32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - External‐DigitalInput03h_IExternalDigitalInput04a_I - External‐DigitalInput04h_I

WAGO Inputs 33 - 48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - External‐DigitalInput05h_IExternalDigitalInput06a_I - External‐DigitalInput06h_I

WAGO Inputs 49 - 64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - External‐DigitalInput07h_IExternalDigitalInput08a_I - External‐DigitalInput08h_I

WAGO Inputs 65 - 80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - External‐DigitalInput09h_IExternalDigitalInput10a_I - External‐DigitalInput10h_I

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual122 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 125: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesWAGO Inputs 81 - 96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - External‐

DigitalInput11h_IExternalDigitalInput12a_I - External‐DigitalInput12h_I

WAGO Outputs 1 - 16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput01h_OExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput02h_O

WAGO Outputs 17 - 32

2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput03h_OExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput04h_O

WAGO Outputs 33 - 48

2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput05h_OExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput06h_O

WAGO Outputs 49 - 64

2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput07h_OExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput08h_O

PFD1 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD2 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD3 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD4 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Drive Losses 2161 % / 100 Unsigned Excessive Reactive Current

2162 & / 100 Unsigned

Speed Droop Percent 2163 & / 100 Unsigned Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 & / 100 Unsigned Avail Reactive Cur‐rent

2653 % / 100 Unsigned

Drive Efficiency 2168 % / 100 Unsigned Ids Ref Current 2276 % / 100 Unsigned

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 123

Page 126: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.4.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list VariablesRefer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Table 7-21 Data-to-Drive Pick-listName None None None None NoneFixed REg Bits None None Bit Field • When parameter 'Net Control

Type' (9945) is set to 'SOP' the bits will be used in teh SOP to control drive functions.

• When parameter 'Net Control Tyupe' (9945) is set to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as fol‐lows in the control software:– Bit 0: Run Forward– Bit 1: Run Reverse– Bit 2: Fault Reset– Bit 3: Stop– Bit 4: Reserved– Bit 5: Start / Stop Control

from Networkj– Bit 6: Spped Command

from Network– Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for fu‐

ture assignmentVelocity Demand

Hz / 10 Signed Speed DemandRPM 1% / 10

Auxiliary Demand Hz / 10 Signed Auxiliary Speed Demand RPM 1 % / 10Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag0_I ~ Net‐work1Flag15_INetwork 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag0_I ~ Net‐work2Flag15_I

Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags: Network1Flag16_I ~ Net‐work1Flag31_INetwork 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag16_I ~ Net‐work2Flag31_I

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual124 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 127: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag32_I ~ Net‐work1Flag47_I Network 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag32_I ~ Net‐work2Flag47_I

Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:Network1Flag48_I ~ Net‐work1Flag63_I Network 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag48_I ~ Net‐work2Flag63_I

Ratio % % / 100 Signed Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Torque Limit % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned MUX1 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX2 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX3 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX4 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX5 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX6 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX7 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX8 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersPTD1 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD2 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD3 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD4 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteParallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 125

Page 128: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned Node Count None None Unsigned Node Index None None Unsigned Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned Avg Ids Ref Amps / 10000 Unisgned

Profibus Communication 7.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual126 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 129: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.5 Planning/Configuring

7.5.1 Planning Configuring IntroductionThis section describes the setup methods available for communication.The following topics are explained:• Fast setup procedures• Network setup procedure• Network status detection• Setup procedure example

NoteFast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.

7.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configurationFast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Set parameter "Profibus Address" (9904) to the desired network address for the drive..3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed".

This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in table Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions.

4. Add the following line to the SOP: Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Table 7-22 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 127

Page 130: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Bit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

Network1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value

sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

7.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedbackTo read status data from the drive, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".

This setup assumes that an existing working TCP/IP network is established.2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.4. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from the drive.

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual128 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 131: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the table General Status Bits (default definitions) .

Table 7-23 General Status Bits (default definitions) TableBit Number Meaning in Drive Control Software Value0 Fault 0 = False

1 = True1 Alarm2 RunningForward3 RunningReverse4 DriveReady5 StartStopControlFromNetwork6 SpeedFromNetwork7 AtSpeedReference8 SpeedInPercent9 SpeedInRPM10 SpeedInHz11 Reserved for future use12 Reserved for future use13 Reserved for future use14 Reserved for future use15 Reserved for future use

NoteYou cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.

7.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the driveFollow the steps below to send a motor speed setting to the drive.1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,

to one of the following options:– %– RPM– Hertz

2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register "Data to Drive 02'. This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01'. The motor now accepts the speed setting from the PLC.

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 129

Page 132: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOPTo control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at register 'Data to Drive 01'.

NoteThe 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default configuration is used or not.You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.

To control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP".

This makes the definitions of the fixed register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.

4. Set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick-list variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.

5. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;

7.5.6 Network SetupAccess is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access Configure Parameters Menu (9902 ) parameters.Refer to the NXGPro+ Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels and codes.

NoteSetup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu of the Communications Menu (9).

Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the menus needed to complete setup.

Network Set-up Procedure1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Profibus" and press

[ENTER]. The configuration parameters are viewable.2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual130 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 133: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.

4. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %:

5. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.6. Use table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to program the drive to send data to and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses that provide basic drive send and receive functionality. These are not changeable.

7. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:– Enter from a choice of variables in the pick-lists.

The pick-lists in the menus contain the most commonly used data variables. Refer to section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the pick-lists.NoteA pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register

– For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use the list of data IDs available in appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable. Use the corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.NoteThe output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.

– Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to section Software Programming for details.NoteThe PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOPOnly if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the SOP.

Set Flags in the SOP for Drive Control through a NetworkEnsure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following

network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP: Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 131

Page 134: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7.5.7 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC)TaskSet up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:• General Status• Motor speed• Output Power• Number of Active Faults

Procedure (Task Example)Refer to table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to establish whether an address or register is changeable.• General Status and Motor Speed Indication: 1. "Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicated general status.

Action: No action is required.2. 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed.

Action: No action is required.3. 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate output power4. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9403.5. Choose 'output power' from the pick-list.

Action: Output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.

• Number of Active Faults Indication1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate the number of active faults.2. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9404.

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual132 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 135: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. The pick-list of data from drive variables appears. A 'number of active faults' is not an option displayed in the pick-list.Action: Manually specify the number of active faults.Refer to table Data From Drive-Pick List Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.

4. Refer to appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables.Actions: – Determine its data ID number (3000).– Use the arrow or number keys to enter 3000 and press [ENTER].

The display now shows "ManId-3000". – The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'. – If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.

– Ensure that the data ID is correct.

Table 7-24 Table of Completed Settings for Given ExamplePLC Address or Register Data ScalingData from Drive 01 (not changeable) General Status 16 bitsData from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor Speed RPMData from Drive 03 Output Power kWData from Drive 04 Number of Faults 0 to 128

7.5.8 Network Status (Auto Detect)Network Status (Pulse Timeout)A SOP flag is available to show the network status:• For network 1: Network1CommOk_I • For network 2: Network2CommOk_IThe SOP flag sets to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0" (false) when it is not operating normally.The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20 milliseconds.. If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.

7.5.9 PLC Setup Using GSD FilesA GSD file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the Profibus™ Trade Organization (PTO) guidelines. Contact Siemens customer service for GSD files.Each device on the Profibus™network must have a GSD file. The GSD file provides all relevant data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool.

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 133

Page 136: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The GSD file provides an option for 136 bytes of input and output. If the configuration tool cannot accommodate 136 bytes, the GSD file allows the choice of adding 8 or 16 bytes at a time, until the correct quantity of input and output bytes are selected.

NoteTo communicate with the drive, you must configure the Profibus™ controller to have the same quantity of bytes that are set by parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network 2 I/O Size' (9952).

Profibus Communication 7.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual134 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 137: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

DeviceNet Communication 88.1 DeviceNet Description

This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a DeviceNet™ network. It addresses the following topics:• Description of the interface• User programming• Parameter assignment and addressing• Configuration and setup options• Available functions

DescriptionThe drive supports DeviceNet™ (Profile 12) communication via an Anybus™ DeviceNet™ module. DeviceNet™ (Profile 12) communication functions in the following way: • The Anybus DeviceNet™ module is implemented according to the Open DeviceNet Vendor

Association (ODVA) specification for a communication adapter (Profile 12) and acts as a "group two only server" on the network.

• The baud rate is auto detected and network address is selected through the drive menu system.The module supports the following baud rates:– 125 kbits / s– 250 kbits / s– 500 kbits / sDeviceNet™ is a trademark o ODVA. Additional information about DeviceNet™ is available from www.odva.org.NoteTo enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 135

Page 138: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

8.2 AnyBus DeviceNet Module

DescriptionThe Anybus DeviceNet™ module supports DeviceNet communication. The module plugs into the Network 1 connector or the Network 2 connector on the NXGPro+ DCR, as shown in figure NXGPro+ Control in the Introduction Chapter.The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ DeviceNet™ module.

Status IndicatorsThe following figure shows the status indicators.

2

Figure 8-1 DeviceNet Communication Module Status Indicator Locations

Refer to the following tables to view explanations of the network status LED and the module status LED.

Table 8-1 Network Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff Not online / No network powerGreen Online, one or more connections establishedGreen, flashing (1 Hz) Online, no connections establishedRed Critical-like failure, fatal eventRed, flashing (1 Hz) One or more connections time outAlternating Red / Green Executing self-test

1 Item 1 in figure DeviceNet Communication Module Status Indicator Locations

DeviceNet Communication8.2 AnyBus DeviceNet Module

NXGPro+ Communication Manual136 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 139: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 8-2 Module Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff Not operatingGreen Operating in normal conditionGreen, flashing (1 Hz) Missing, incorrect or incompatible configuration, device needs

commissioningRed Unrecoverable faults(s)Red, flashing (1 Hz) Recoverable faults(s)Alternating Red / Green Executing self-test

1 Item 2 in figure DeviceNet Communication Module Status Indicator Locations

DeviceNet Communication8.2 AnyBus DeviceNet Module

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 137

Page 140: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

8.3 Software Programming

8.3.1 Section OverviewThis section provides details for user programming through the SOP. The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition of the bits, complete the steps as described.1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits

controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup for

– programmable inputs to the drive– programmable outputs from the drive

Table Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits available for use in the SOP (Drctry.plus bits).

Table 8-3 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register BitsPick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.plus bitsFixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_IFixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_I

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

DeviceNet Communication8.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual138 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 141: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03' which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).– The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List

Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data to drive pick-list variables.

– Scroll through the pick-list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

– the corresponding bits from the Drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below::Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit:Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bitRunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

3. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on for each subsequent set of 16 bits.Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

8.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.It can be seen that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).The pick-list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data to drive pick list variables.

DeviceNet Communication8.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 139

Page 142: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.The corresponding bits from the drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit.RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

4. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on in the same manner for the next set of 16 bits.

Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 8-4 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_INet Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I

Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I

DeviceNet Communication8.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual140 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 143: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium voltage:• The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using

the procedure described in the previous paragraphs.• The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the

following SOP source code:;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;

• The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input medium voltage trip.

8.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the Drive

DescriptionThere are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using tyable Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register 'Data from Drive 03' which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).

2. Enter parameter ID (9403). 3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data from Drive Pick List

Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data from drive pick-list variables.

4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on. The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) and Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 8-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O

DeviceNet Communication8.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 141

Page 144: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O

Table 8-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input medium voltage:• The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using the

procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following

SOP source code:; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus networkNetwork1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;

• This example show usage of bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1' which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.

• The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a medium voltage fault occurred.

DeviceNet Communication8.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual142 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 145: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

8.4.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing preludeThis section provides the following information for communication configuration and programming:• Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address• Parameter tables:

– Network configuration parameters– Network 1 configuration parameters– Network 2 configuration parameters

• Pick-list variable tables:– Data from Drive variables– Data to Drive variables (with scaling and range)

8.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address

The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding register addresses. The following data is provided:• Parameter ID

The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.• DeviceNet™ Network Data

DeviceNet (Profile 12) uses a pre-defined byte count to communicate between the controller and the drive.– The drive uses up to 136 bytes for input and output. 28 bytes are used to form the 6416-

bit registers (2 bytes per register).8 bytes are ‘reserved’ for future use.– The data received (128 bytes) is mapped to the 64 data to drive registers and the data sent

to the PLC is defined using the 64 data from drive registers.• Data From Drive

Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions and others are programmable to track any of a number of drive status choices.

• Data To DriveData that the PLC will send to the drive to control it. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to control certain functions and others are programmable to control any of a number of drive function choices.

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 143

Page 146: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 8-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Register DataNet‐work

Parameter ID Description Default Contents DeviceNet™ Network Data

1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status(not changeable)

Word 1 to network

1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changeable)

Word 2 to network

1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 to network1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits

(not changeable) Word 1 from network

1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)

Word 2 from network

1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 63 from network2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status

(not changeable)Word 1 to network

2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changeable)

Word 2 to network

2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 to network2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not

changeable) Word 1 from network

2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand(not changeable)

Word 2 from network

8.4.3 Parameter Tables

Network Parameters

Table 8-8 Network Control Menu (9943)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net Control Type 9944 SOP Set bit definition:

• SOP• Fixed

Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:• Maintained• Momentary

Table 8-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2

registers.

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual144 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 147: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network 1 Parameters

Table 8-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Network 1 Type 9903 None Designate the type of external network connected to

the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet • Ethernet I/P

Table 8-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description DeviceNet™ Address 9908 10 1 63 Set the address of the node on the Device‐

Net™ network.Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from

the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand ref‐erence from the network.

Network 1 I/O Size 9951 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output data bytes.

Table 8-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to

9464 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 145

Page 148: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 8-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to

9664 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Network 2 Parameters

Table 8-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Ma

x Description

Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet• Ethernet I/P

Table 8-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description DeviceNet™ Address 9922 10 1 63 Set the address of the node on the Device‐

Net™ network.Velocity Units 9924 Designate the units for velocity values

from the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Network 2 I/O Size 9952 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output da‐ta bytes.

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual146 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 149: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 8-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to

9564 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 8-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to

9764 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

8.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables

Table 8-18 Data from Drive Pick-list VariablesName Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNone None None None None NoneMan Id None None None None Refer to appendix Internal Drive Net‐

work

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 147

Page 150: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesGeneral Status 2001 None None Bit Field • Bit 0: Fault

• Bit 1: Alarm• Bit 2: Running Forward • Bit 3: Running Reverse • Bit 4: Drive Ready • Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Net‐

work • Bit 6: Speed Reference From Net‐

work • Bit 7: At Speed Reference • Bit 8: Speed In Percent • Bit 9: Speed In RPM• Bit 10: Speed In Hz• Bit 11: Reserved for future use • Bit 12: Reserved for future use • Bit 13: Reserved for future use • Bit 14: Reserved for future use • Bit 15: Reserved for future use

Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed Motor Speed 2014 %

RPMHz

/10/1/10

Unsigned

Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecondDrive State 2210 None None Unsigned • 0 = Off

• 1 = Magnetizing• 2 = Spinning Load• 3 = Autotune• 4 = Run• 5 = Stop• 6 = Coast• 7 = Up Transfer• 8 = Down Transfer

Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Net‐

work1Flag15_I

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual148 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 151: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNet1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Net‐

work1Flag31_INet1 Out Reg 3 2004 Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Net‐

work1Flag37_INet1 Out Reg 4 2005 Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Net‐

work1Flag63_INet2 Out Reg 1 2006 Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Net‐

work2Flag15_INet2 Out Reg 2 2007 Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Net‐

work2Flag31_INet2 Out Reg 3 2008 Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Net‐

work2Flag37_INet2 Out Reg 4 2009 Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Net‐

work2Flag63_ITorque Current 2150 Amps Unsigned Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps Unsigned Motor Flux 2015 % Unsigned Motor Torque 2160 % Unsigned Flux Reference 2011 % Unsigned Input Voltage 2120 Volts Unsigned Inp Power Factor 2012 % Unsigned Input KVars 2013 KVAR Unsigned Max Available Out‐put Volts

2016 Volts /1 Unsigned

Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest CellMux1 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux1 Data None None None None Refer to appendixMultiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data Registers

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 149

Page 152: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesMux6 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux7 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersWAGO Inputs 1 -16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - External‐

DigitalInput01h_IExternalDigitalInput02a_I - External‐DigitalInput02h_I

WAGO Inputs 17 - 32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - External‐DigitalInput03h_IExternalDigitalInput04a_I - External‐DigitalInput04h_I

WAGO Inputs 33 - 48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - External‐DigitalInput05h_IExternalDigitalInput06a_I - External‐DigitalInput06h_I

WAGO Inputs 49 - 64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - External‐DigitalInput07h_IExternalDigitalInput08a_I - External‐DigitalInput08h_I

WAGO Inputs 65 - 80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - External‐DigitalInput09h_IExternalDigitalInput10a_I - External‐DigitalInput10h_I

WAGO Inputs 81 - 96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - External‐DigitalInput11h_IExternalDigitalInput12a_I - External‐DigitalInput12h_I

WAGO Outputs 1 - 16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput01h_OExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput02h_O

WAGO Outputs 17 - 32

2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput03h_OExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput04h_O

WAGO Outputs 33 - 48

2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput05h_OExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput06h_O

WAGO Outputs 49 - 64

2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput07h_OExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput08h_O

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual150 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 153: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesPFD1 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePFD2 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePFD3 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePFD4 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteDrive Losses 2161 % / 100 Unsigned Excessive Reactive Current

2162 & / 100 Unsigned

Speed Droop Percent 2163 & / 100 Unsigned Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 & / 100 Unsigned Avail Reactive Cur‐rent

2653 % / 100 Unsigned

Drive Efficiency 2168 % / 100 Unsigned Ids Ref Current 2276 % / 100 Unsigned

8.4.5 Data-to-Drive Pick-list VariablesRefer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Table 8-19 Data-to-Drive Pick-listName None None None None NoneFixed REg Bits None None Bit Field • When parameter 'Net Control

Type' (9945) is set to 'SOP' the bits will be used in teh SOP to control drive functions.

• When parameter 'Net Control Tyupe' (9945) is set to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as fol‐lows in the control software:– Bit 0: Run Forward– Bit 1: Run Reverse– Bit 2: Fault Reset– Bit 3: Stop– Bit 4: Reserved– Bit 5: Start / Stop Control

from Networkj– Bit 6: Spped Command

from Network– Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for fu‐

ture assignment

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 151

Page 154: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Velocity Demand

Hz / 10 Signed Speed DemandRPM 1% / 10

Auxiliary Demand Hz / 10 Signed Auxiliary Speed Demand RPM 1 % / 10Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:

Network1Flag0_I ~ Net‐work1Flag15_INetwork 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag0_I ~ Net‐work2Flag15_I

Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags: Network1Flag16_I ~ Net‐work1Flag31_INetwork 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag16_I ~ Net‐work2Flag31_I

Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:Network1Flag32_I ~ Net‐work1Flag47_I Network 2 SOP flags:Network2Flag32_I ~ Net‐work2Flag47_I

Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:Network1Flag48_I ~ Net‐work1Flag63_I Network 2 SOP flags: Network2Flag48_I ~ Net‐work2Flag63_I

Ratio % % / 100 Signed Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned Torque Limit % / 10000 or % / 100 Unsigned MUX1 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX2 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX3 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data Registers

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual152 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 155: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name MUX4 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX5 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX6 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX7 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersMUX8 Id None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer

(MUX) Data RegistersPTD1 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD2 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD3 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WritePTD4 None None None Refer to appendix Parameter

Read / WriteParallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned Node Count None None Unsigned Node Index None None Unsigned Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned Avg Ids Ref Amps / 10000 Unisgned

DeviceNet Communication8.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 153

Page 156: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

8.5 Planning/Configuring

8.5.1 Planning Configuring IntroductionThis section describes the setup methods available for communication.The following topics are explained:• Fast setup procedures• Network setup procedure• Network status detection• Setup procedure example

NoteFast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.

8.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configurationFast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "DeviceNet".2. Set parameter "DeviceNet Address" (9908) to the desired network address for the drive..3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed".

This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in table Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions.

4. Add the following line to the SOP: Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Table 8-20 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault resetNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual154 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 157: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Bit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value

sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

8.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedbackTo read status data from the drive, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "DeviceNet".2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address (9908)' to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.4. Refer to the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to obtain the addresses for general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from the drive.

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 155

Page 158: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following table.

Table 8-21 General Status Bits (default definitions) TableBit Number Meaning in Drive Control Software Value0 Fault 0 = False

1 = True1 Alarm2 RunningForward3 RunningReverse4 DriveReady5 StartStopControlFromNetwork6 SpeedFromNetwork7 AtSpeedReference8 SpeedInPercent9 SpeedInRPM10 SpeedInHz11 Reserved for future use12 Reserved for future use13 Reserved for future use14 Reserved for future use15 Reserved for future use

NoteYou cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.

8.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the driveFollow the steps below to send a motor speed setting to the drive.1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,

to one of the following options:– %– RPM– Hertz

2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register "Data to Drive 02'. This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01'. The motor now accepts the speed setting from the PLC.

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual156 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 159: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

8.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOPTo control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at register 'Data to Drive 01'.

NoteThe 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default configuration is used or not.You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.

To control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "DeviceNet".2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address' (9908) to the desired network address for the drive.

8.5.6 Network SetupAccess is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access Configure Parameters Menu (9902) parameters.Refer to the NXGPro+ Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels and codes.

NoteSetup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu of the Communications Menu (9).

Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the menus needed to complete setup.

Network Set-up Procedure1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Ethernet/ IP" and press

[ENTER]. The configuration parameters are viewable.2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address' (9908) to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor commanded

speed and motor feedback speed scaling.4. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:

n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %:5. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 157

Page 160: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6. Use table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to program the drive to send data to and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses that provide basic drive send and receive functionality. These are not changeable.

7. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:– For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually.

NoteA pick-list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.

– Enter a variable that is not included in the pick-lists, using the output data ID number. Use the list of data IDs available in appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable. Use the corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.NoteThe output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.

– Enter from a choice of variables in the pick-lists. The pick-lists in the menus contain the most commonly used data variables. Refer to section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the pick-lists.NoteA pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.

– Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to section Software Programming for details.NoteThe PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOPOnly if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the SOP.

Set Flags in the SOP for Drive Control through a NetworkEnsure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following

network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP: Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual158 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 161: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

8.5.7 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC)TaskSet up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:• General Status• Motor speed• Output Power• Number of Active Faults

Procedure (Task Example)Refer to table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to establish whether an address or register is changeable.• General Status and Motor Speed Indication: 1. "Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicated general status.

Action: No action is required.2. 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed.

Action: No action is required.3. 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate output power4. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9403.5. Choose 'output power' from the pick-list.

Action: Output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.

• Number of Active Faults Indication1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate the number of active faults.2. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9404.

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 159

Page 162: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. The pick-list of data from drive variables appears. A 'number of active faults' is not an option displayed in the pick-list.Action: Manually specify the number of active faults.Refer to table Data From Drive-Pick List Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.

4. Refer to appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables.Actions: – Determine its data ID number (3000).– Use the arrow or number keys to enter 3000 and press [ENTER].

The display now shows "ManId-3000". – The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'. – If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.

– Ensure that the data ID is correct.

Table 8-22 Table of Completed Settings for Given ExamplePLC Address or Register Data ScalingData from Drive 01 (not changeable) General Status 16 bitsData from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor Speed RPMData from Drive 03 Output Power kWData from Drive 04 Number of Faults 0 to 128

8.5.8 Network Status (Auto Detect)Network Status (Pulse Timeout)A SOP flag is available to show the network status:• For network 1: Network1CommOk_I • For network 2: Network2CommOk_IThe SOP flag sets to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0" (false) when it is not operating normally.The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20 milliseconds.. If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.

8.5.9 PLC Setup using EDS filesAn EDS file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the ODVA guidelines.

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual160 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 163: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Contact Siemens customer service for EDS files.

NoteEach device on the DeviceNet™ network must have an EDS file.

The EDS file provides:• all relevant data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool. • an option for more than 136 bytes of input and output

However, the drive only uses up to 136 bytes of input and output. If the configuration tool cannot accommodate 136 bytes, you can modify the I/O Size, until the correct quantity of input and output bytes is selected.

NoteTo communicate with the drive, you must configure the DeviceNet™ controller to match the same quantity of bytes that are set by parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network 2 I/O Size' (9952).

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 161

Page 164: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

DeviceNet Communication8.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual162 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 165: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ControlNet Communication 99.1 ConrolNet Description

This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a ControlNet™ network. It addresses the following topics:• Description of the interface• User programming• Parameter assignment and addressing• Configuration and setup options

DescriptionThe drive supports ControlNet™ communication via an Anybus-S™ ControlNet™ module. ControlNet™ (Profile 12) communication functions in the following way: • The Anybus ControlNet™ module is classified as a ControlNet™ adapter, that is, the module

cannot originate connections on its own, but a scanner node can open a connection to the module. The module is implemented according to the ControlNet™ International specification for a communication adapter (Profile 12).

• The module has 2 BNC contacts for connection to the ControlNet™ network. Additional information about ControlNet™ is available from www.controlnet.org. To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 163

Page 166: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.2 Anybus ControlNet Module

DescriptionThe following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ ContolNet™ module.

Status IndicatorsThe following figure shows the status indicators on the AnyBus™ ControlNet™ module.

Figure 9-1 ControlNet Module with Status Indicator LocationsRefer to the following tables to view explainations of the network status LEDs,and module status LED.

Table 9-1 Network Status LED1 LED LED State DescriptionLED A and B Off Not online / No power

Red, Flashing (1 Hz) Incorrect node configuration, duplicate MAC ID, etc.

Alternating Red / Green Self-test of bus controllerRed Fatal event or faulty unit

LED A or B Off Channel is disabledAlternating Red / Green Invalid link configurationGreen, Flashing (1 Hz) Temporary errors (node will self-correct) or

node is not configured to go onlineGreen Normal operationRed, Flashing (1 Hz) Media fault or no node on the network

1 Items 1 and 3 in figure ControlNet Module with Status IndicatorLocations

ControlNet Communication9.2 Anybus ControlNet Module

NXGPro+ Communication Manual164 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 167: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 9-2 Module Status LED1 LED State DescriptionOff No PowerGreen Operating in normal condition, controlled by a scanner in RUN stateGreen, flashing Module has not been configured or the scanner is in IDLE stateRed Unrecoverable fault(s), EXCEPTION, fatal eventRed, flashing Recoverable fault(s) MAC ID has been changed after initialization etc.

1 Item 2 in figure ControlNet Module with Status Indicator Locations

ControlNet Communication9.2 Anybus ControlNet Module

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 165

Page 168: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.3 Software Programming

9.3.1 Section OverviewThis section provides details for user programming through the SOP. The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition of the bits, complete the steps as described.1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits

controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup for

– programmable inputs to the drive– programmable outputs from the drive

The table Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits available for use in the SOP (drctry.plus bits).

Table 9-3 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register BitsPick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.plus bitsFixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_IFixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedRegBit15_I

9.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the Drive

Programmable Inputs to the DriveThere are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using table Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.It can be seen that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).

2. Enter parameter ID (9603).The pick-list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data to Drive Pick List Variables and Scaling in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data to drive pick list variables.

ControlNet Communication9.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual166 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 169: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.The corresponding bits from the drctry.plus file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit.RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using bit 1, stop using bit 0

4. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and continue on in the same manner for the next set of 16 bits.

Note• By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register

'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.

The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 9-4 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_INet Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I

Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_INet Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_INet Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I

ControlNet Communication9.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 167

Page 170: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium voltage:• The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using

the procedure described in the previous paragraphs.• The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the

following SOP source code:;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;

• The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input medium voltage trip.

9.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the Drive

DescriptionThere are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.

Programming Procedure1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using tyable Correspondence

between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing. You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register 'Data from Drive 03' which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).

2. Enter parameter ID (9403). 3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to table Data from Drive Pick List

Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of data from drive pick-list variables.

4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.

5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on. The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in tables Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9603-9664) and Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9703-9764) for network 1 and 2, respectively.

Table 9-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O

ControlNet Communication9.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication Manual168 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 171: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O

Table 9-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' me‐nus

Related Drctry.plus bits

Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O

ExampleThe following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input medium voltage:• The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using the

procedure above.• The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following

SOP source code:; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus networkNetwork1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;

• This example show usage of bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1' which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.

• The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a medium voltage fault occurred.

ControlNet Communication9.3 Software Programming

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 169

Page 172: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

9.4.1 Parameter Assignment Addressing preludeThis section provides the following information for communication configuration and programming:• Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address• Parameter tables:

– Network configuration parameters– Network 1 configuration parameters– Network 2 configuration parameters

• Pick-list variable tables:– Data from Drive variables– Data to Drive variables (with scaling and range)

9.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (G28, G38)

The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding register addresses. The following data is provided:• Parameter ID

The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.• ControlNet™ Network Data

ControlNet uses a pre-defined byte count to communicate between the master and the drive.– The drive uses up to 136 bytes for input and output. 128 bytes are used to form the 6416-

bit registers (2 bytes per register).8 bytes are ‘reserved’ for future use.– The data received (128 bytes) is mapped to the 64 data to drive registers and the data sent

to the PLC is defined using the 64 data from drive registers.

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual170 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 173: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

• Data From DriveData that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions and others are programmable to track any of a number of drive status hoices.You must configure the ControlNet™ master to communicate using 136 input data bytes and136 output data bytes.

• Data To DriveData that the PLC will send to the drive to control it. Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular aspect of drive functionality. Some registers are fixed to control certain functions and others are programmable to control any of a number of drive function choices.

Table 9-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Register DataNet‐work

Parameter ID Description Default Contents DeviceNet™ Network Data

1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status(not changeable)

Word 1 to network

1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changeable)

Word 2 to network

1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 to network1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits

(not changeable) Word 1 from network

1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)

Word 2 from network

1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 from network2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status

(not changeable)Word 1 to network

2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed(not changeable)

Word 2 to network

2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 to network2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits

(not changeable) Word 1 to network

2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)

Word 2 to network

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 171

Page 174: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.4.3 Parameter Tables

Network Parameters

Table 9-8 Network Control Menu (9943)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net Control Type 9944 SOP Set bit definition:

• SOP• Fixed

Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:• Maintained• Momentary

Table 9-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2

registers.

Network 1 Parameters

Table 9-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Network 1 Type 9903 None Designate the type of external network connected to

the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet • Ethernet I/P

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual172 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 175: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 9-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description ControlNet™ Ad‐dress

9904 9 1 99 Set the address of the node on the Control‐Net™ network.

Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand ref‐erence from the network.

Table 9-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to

9464 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

Table 9-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to

9664 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 173

Page 176: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Network 2 Parameters

Table 9-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Ma

x Description

Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the drive:• None• Modbus• DeviceNet• Profibus• Ethernet Modbus• ControlNet• Ethernet I/P

Table 9-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description ControlNet™ Address 9939 9 1 99 Set the address of the node on the Con‐

trolNet™ network.Velocity Units 9924 Designate the units for velocity values

from the drive:• % • RPM• Hz

Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from the network.

Table 9-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐

tus Register data from drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to

9564 None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual174 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 177: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Table 9-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Register data to drive parameter 1.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐

mand Register data to drive parameter 2.

Register is not programmable.Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to

9764 None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.

Registers are programmable.

9.4.4 Pick-list Variable Tables

Table 9-18 Data from Drive Pick-list VariablesName Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesNone None None None None NoneMan Id None None None None Refer to appendix Internal Drive Net‐

workGeneral Status 2001 None None Bit Field • Bit 0: Fault

• Bit 1: Alarm• Bit 2: Running Forward • Bit 3: Running Reverse • Bit 4: Drive Ready • Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Net‐

work • Bit 6: Speed Reference From Net‐

work • Bit 7: At Speed Reference • Bit 8: Speed In Percent • Bit 9: Speed In RPM• Bit 10: Speed In Hz• Bit 11: Reserved for future use • Bit 12: Reserved for future use • Bit 13: Reserved for future use • Bit 14: Reserved for future use • Bit 15: Reserved for future use

Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed Motor Speed 2014 %

RPMHz

/10/1/10

Unsigned

Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 175

Page 178: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesHeartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecondDrive State 2210 None None Unsigned • 0 = Off

• 1 = Magnetizing• 2 = Spinning Load• 3 = Autotune• 4 = Run• 5 = Stop• 6 = Coast• 7 = Up Transfer• 8 = Down Transfer

Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Net‐

work1Flag15_INet1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Net‐

work1Flag31_INet1 Out Reg 3 2004 Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Net‐

work1Flag37_INet1 Out Reg 4 2005 Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Net‐

work1Flag63_INet2 Out Reg 1 2006 Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Net‐

work2Flag15_INet2 Out Reg 2 2007 Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Net‐

work2Flag31_INet2 Out Reg 3 2008 Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Net‐

work2Flag37_INet2 Out Reg 4 2009 Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Net‐

work2Flag63_ITorque Current 2150 Amps Unsigned Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps Unsigned Motor Flux 2015 % Unsigned Motor Torque 2160 % Unsigned Flux Reference 2011 % Unsigned Input Voltage 2120 Volts Unsigned Inp Power Factor 2012 % Unsigned Input KVars 2013 KVAR Unsigned Max Available Out‐put

2016 Volts /1 Unsigned

Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest CellMux1 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux1 Data None None None None Refer to appendixMultiplexer (MUX)

Data Registers

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual176 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 179: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesMux2 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux2 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux3 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux4 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux5 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux6 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux7 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Echo None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersMux8 Data None None None None Refer to appendix Multiplexer (MUX)

Data RegistersWAGO Inputs 1 -16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - External‐

DigitalInput01h_IExternalDigitalInput02a_I - External‐DigitalInput02h_I

WAGO Inputs 17 - 32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - External‐DigitalInput03h_IExternalDigitalInput04a_I - External‐DigitalInput04h_I

WAGO Inputs 33 - 48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - External‐DigitalInput05h_IExternalDigitalInput06a_I - External‐DigitalInput06h_I

WAGO Inputs 49 - 64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - External‐DigitalInput07h_IExternalDigitalInput08a_I - External‐DigitalInput08h_I

WAGO Inputs 65 - 80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - External‐DigitalInput09h_IExternalDigitalInput10a_I - External‐DigitalInput10h_I

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 177

Page 180: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Name Manual ID Unit Scaling 16-bit Data Type NotesWAGO Inputs 81 - 96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - External‐

DigitalInput11h_IExternalDigitalInput12a_I - External‐DigitalInput12h_I

WAGO Outputs 1 - 16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput01h_OExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput02h_O

WAGO Outputs 17 - 32

2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput03h_OExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput04h_O

WAGO Outputs 33 - 48

2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput05h_OExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput06h_O

WAGO Outputs 49 - 64

2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput07h_OExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - Exter‐nalDigitalOutput08h_O

PFD1 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD2 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD3 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

PFD4 None None None None Refer to appendix Parameter Read / Write

Drive Losses 2161 % / 100 Unsigned Excessive Reactive Current

2162 & / 100 Unsigned

Speed Droop Percent 2163 & / 100 Unsigned Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 & / 100 Unsigned Avail Reactive Cur‐rent

2653 % / 100 Unsigned

Drive Efficiency 2168 % / 100 Unsigned Ids Ref Current 2276 % / 100 Unsigned

ControlNet Communication9.4 Parameter Asssignment / Addressing

NXGPro+ Communication Manual178 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 181: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.5 Planning/Configuring

9.5.1 Planning Configuring IntroductionThis section describes the setup methods available for communication.The following topics are explained:• Fast setup procedures• Network setup procedure• Network status detection• Setup procedure example

NoteFast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.

9.5.2 Fast Setup:Control the drive using the default configurationFast Setup: Control the drive using the default configurationTo control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's 'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address located in the section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.Setup Procedure:To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps in the order described1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "ControlNet".2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed".

This sets the bits at register 'Data to Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as shown in Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions Table.

4. Add the following line to the SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

Table 9-19 Fixed Register Bits Default Definitions TableBit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit0_I Run forwardNetwork1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverseNetwork1FixedRegBit2_I Fault resetNetwork1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 179

Page 182: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Bit Default DefinitionNetwork1FixedRegBit4_I ReservedNetwork1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from networkNetwork1FixedRegBit7_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit8_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit9_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit10_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit11_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit12_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit13_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit14_I Reserved for future assignmentNetwork1FixedRegBit15_I Reserved for future assignment

1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control' (9945) is set to "Momentary", otherwise this bit is reserved.

NoteRunning and Stopping the Drive• To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value

sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).• To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.

9.5.3 Fast Setup:Monitor drive status and speed feedbackTo read status data from the drive, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "ControlNet".2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address (9903)' to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.4. Refer to the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to obtain the addresses for general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from the drive.

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual180 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 183: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the General Status Bits (default definitions) Table.

Table 9-20 General Status Bits (default definitions) TableBit Number Meaning in Drive Control Software Value0 Fault 0 = False

1 = True1 Alarm2 RunningForward3 RunningReverse4 DriveReady5 StartStopControlFromNetwork6 SpeedFromNetwork7 AtSpeedReference8 SpeedInPercent9 SpeedInRPM10 SpeedInHz11 Reserved for future use12 Reserved for future use13 Reserved for future use14 Reserved for future use15 Reserved for future use

NoteYou cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.

9.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the driveFollow the steps below to send a motor speed setting to the drive.1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,

to one of the following options:– %– RPM– Hertz

2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register "Data to Drive 02'. This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in the table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01'. The motor now accepts the speed setting from the PLC.

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 181

Page 184: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOPTo control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at register 'Data to Drive 01'.

NoteThe 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default configuration is used or not.You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.

To control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP, complete the following steps as indicated:1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "ControlNet".2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed

register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.4. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to

section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick-list variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.

5. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;

9.5.6 Network SetupAccess is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code toaccess Configure Parameters Menu (9902) parameters.Refer to the NXGPro+ Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels and codes.

NoteSetup functions are contained in Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu of the Communications Menu (9).

Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the menus needed to complete setup.

Network Set-up Procedure1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "ControlNet" and press

[ENTER]. The configuration parameters are viewable.2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual182 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 185: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.

4. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %:

5. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.6. Use table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol

Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to program the drive to send data to and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses that provide basic drive send and receive functionality. These are not changeable.

7. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:– For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually.

NoteA pick-list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.

– Enter a variable that is not included in the pick-lists, using the output data ID number. Use the list of data IDs available in appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable. Use the corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.NoteThe output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.

– Enter from a choice of variables in the pick-lists. The pick-lists in the menus contain the most commonly used data variables. Refer to section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for the pick-lists.NoteA pick-list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.

– Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to section Software Programming for details.NoteThe PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOPOnly if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the SOP.

Set Flags in the SOP for Drive Control through a NetworkEnsure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following

network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;

2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP: Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 183

Page 186: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

9.5.7 Setup Example (indicate drive outputs on the PLC)TaskSet up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:• General Status• Motor speed• Output Power• Number of Active Faults

Procedure (Task Example)Refer to table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing to establish whether an address or register is changeable.• General Status and Motor Speed Indication: 1. "Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicated general status.

Action: No action is required.2. 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed.

Action: No action is required.3. 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate output power4. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9403.5. Choose 'output power' from the pick-list.

Action: Output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.

• Number of Active Faults Indication1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable.

Action: Set to indicate the number of active faults.2. Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.

Action: Enter parameter ID 9404.

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual184 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 187: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

3. The pick-list of data from drive variables appears. A 'number of active faults' is not an option displayed in the pick-list.Action: Manually specify the number of active faults.Refer to table Data From Drive-Pick List Variables in section Parameter Assignment / Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick-list variables.

4. Refer to appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables.Actions: – Determine its data ID number (3000).– Use the arrow or number keys to enter 3000 and press [ENTER].

The display now shows "ManId-3000". – The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.– If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.

– Ensure that the data ID is correct.

Table 9-21 Table of Completed Settings for Given ExamplePLC Address or Register Data ScalingData from Drive 01 (not changeable) General Status 16 bitsData from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor Speed RPMData from Drive 03 Output Power kWData from Drive 04 Number of Faults 0 to 128

9.5.8 Network Status (Auto Detect)Network Status (Pulse Timeout)A SOP flag is available to show the network status:• For network 1: Network1CommOk_I • For network 2: Network2CommOk_IThe SOP flag sets to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0" (false) when it is not operating normally.The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20 milliseconds.. If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.

9.5.9 PLC Setup using EDS filesAn EDS file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the ODVA guidelines.

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 185

Page 188: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Contact Siemens customer service for EDS files.

NoteEach device on the ControlNet™ network must have an EDS file.

The EDS file provides all relevant data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool.

NoteTo communicate with the drive, you must configure the ControlNet™ controller to have 136 input bytes and 136 output bytes.

ControlNet Communication9.5 Planning/Configuring

NXGPro+ Communication Manual186 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 189: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Appendix AA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

The following table lists the drive menu parameters that are pick list types, and their associated values. For a description of each of the menu parameters, refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual, Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing.

Table A-1 Menu Parameter Pick List IDsParameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String1110 Sync motor select 0 No

1 Yes1130 Overload select 0 Constant

1 Straight inverse time2 Inverse time with speed derating

1180 Underload enable 0 Disable1 Enable

1247 H/W Ground Fault Enable 0 No1 Yes

1248 Peak Reduction Enable 0 VFD volt rating1 Mot volt rating

1320 Encoder loss response 0 stop (fault)1 Open loop

1330 Low speed operation 0 Disable1 Enable

2050 Control loop type 0 Volts per Hertz1 Open Loop Vector Control2 Closed Loop Vector Control3 Open Loop Test Mode4 Synch Motor Control5 Closed Loop Synch Motor Control6 Synch Motor DC Exciter7 Permanent Magnet Motor

2051 Parallel system 0 Disable1 Enable

2211 Sop / Menu control 0 Sop flag1 Menu

2430 Spinning load mode 0 Off 1 Forward2 Reverse3 Both

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 187

Page 190: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String2550 Cell Voltage 0 460

1 6302 6903 750 Gen IV4 1375 HV5 600 AP AFE6 750 V AP7 750 V AP 4Q

2584 AP cell PWM harmonic 0 13th1 15th2 17th3 19th4 23rd5 25th6 27th7 29th

2586 AP cell control mode 0 DQ1 QD2 Q only3 Free run DQ4 Free run QD5 Free run Q only

2590 Bypass type 0 Mech1 None

2597 AP Mplx Data Select 0 Manual Value1 Air Temp2 Inlet Temp3 Outlet Temp4 Cur Cmd Lmt5 Id Dmd6 Iq Dmd7 VA8 VB9 VC10 DC Reg Out11 VD Limit Diff12 I Out (Spare)13 I Cap (Spare)14 I Cap (Spare)15 Theta Difference16 PWM Fund Harm17 PWM Period

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual188 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 191: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String2600 Fast bypass 0 Disable

1 Manual2626 DC Bus Reference 0 100 %

1 101 %2 102 %3 103 %4 104 %5 105 %

2630 Neutral connection 0 T21 T1

2635 Precharge Enable 0 Off1 Type 1 HV 3 CB2 Type 2 HV 2 CB3 Type 3 Parallel Drv4 Type 4 (Not used)5 Type 5 Open WC36 Type 6 Closed WC3

2637 Precharge Service Mode 0 Off1 On

2638 Precharge Service Start 0 Stop1 Start

2816 Type (Int Analog 1) 0 0 – 20 mA1 4 – 20 mA2 0 – 10 V

2826 Type (Int Analog 2) 0 0 – 20 mA1 4 – 20 mA2 0 – 10 V

2836 Type (Int Analog 3) 0 0 – 20 mA1 4 – 20 mA2 0 – 10 V

2846 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Analog Outputs

2848 Output Mode (Int Analog Out1) 0 4 – 20 mA1 0 - 20 mA

2856 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Analog Outputs

2858 Output Mode (Int Analog Out2) 0 4 – 20 mA1 0 - 20 mA

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 189

Page 192: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String2861 Analog variable (Int Test Point #28) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Test

Points

2866 Analog variable (Int Test Point #29)2871 Analog variable (Int Test Point #31)2876 Analog variable (Int Test Point #24)2881 Analog variable (Int Test Point #25)2886 Analog variable (Int Test Point #26)2961 Enable high torque 0 Disable

1 Enable2971 Enable watchdog 0 Disable

1 Enable2981 Reactive Current mode 0 Disable

1 Manual2 Auto3 Manual network

3310 Stator resistance estimator 0 Off1 On

3360 Enable braking 0 Off1 On

3470 Test type (Control loop test) 0 Speed1 Torque

4105 Source (Analog input #1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

4110 Type (Analog input #1) 0 0 to 20 mA1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4150 Loss of signal action (Analog input #1) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4175 Source (Analog input #2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

4180 Type (Analog input #2) 0 0 to 20 mA1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4220 Loss of signal action (Analog input #2) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4233 Source (Analog input #3) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual190 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 193: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4234 Type (Analog input #3) 0 0 to 20 mA

1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4238 Loss of signal action (Analog input #3) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4333 Source (Analog input #4) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

4334 Type (Analog input #4) 0 0 to 20 mA1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4338 Loss of signal action (Analog input #4) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4342 Source (Analog input #5) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

4343 Type (Analog input #5) 0 0 to 20 mA1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4347 Loss of signal action (Analog input #5) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4412 Comp 17 A in variable (Comparator 17 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4413 Comp 17 B in variable (Comparator 17 setup)

4416 Compare 17 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4418 Comp 18 A in variable (Comparator 18 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4419 Comp 18 B in variable (Comparator 18 setup)

4422 Compare 18 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4424 Comp 19 A in variable (Comparator 19 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4425 Comp 19 B in variable (Comparator 19 setup)

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 191

Page 194: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4428 Compare 19 type 0 Off

1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4430 Comp 20 A in variable (Comparator 20 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4431 Comp 20 B in variable (Comparator 20 setup)

4434 Compare 20 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4436 Comp 21 A in variable (Comparator 21 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4437 Comp 21 B in variable (Comparator 21 setup)

4440 Compare 21 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4442 Comp 22 A in variable (Comparator 22 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4443 Comp 22 B in variable (Comparator 22 setup)

4446 Compare 22 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4448 Comp 23 A in variable (Comparator 23 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4449 Comp 23 B in variable (Comparator 23 setup)

4452 Compare 23 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4454 Comp 24 A in variable (Comparator 24 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4455 Comp 24 B in variable (Comparator 24 setup)

4458 Compare 24 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4460 Comp 25 A in variable (Comparator 25 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4461 Comp 25 B in variable (Comparator 25 setup)

4464 Compare 25 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual192 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 195: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4466 Comp 26 A in variable (Comparator 26

setup)Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4467 Comp 26 B in variable (Comparator 26 setup)

4470 Compare 26 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4472 Comp 27 A in variable (Comparator 27 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4473 Comp 27 B in variable (Comparator 27 setup)

4476 Compare 27 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4478 Comp 28 A in variable (Comparator 28 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4479 Comp 28 B in variable (Comparator 28 setup)

4482 Compare 28 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4484 Comp 29 A in variable (Comparator 29 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4485 Comp 29 B in variable (Comparator 29 setup)

4488 Compare 29 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4490 Comp 30 A in variable (Comparator 30 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4491 Comp 30 B in variable (Comparator 30 setup)

4494 Compare 30 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4497 Comp 31 A in variable (Comparator 31 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4498 Comp 31 B in variable (Comparator 31 setup)

4501 Compare 31 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4503 Comp 32 A in variable (Comparator 32 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4504 Comp 32 B in variable (Comparator 32 setup)

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 193

Page 196: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4507 Compare 32 type 0 Off

1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4510 Source (Auxiliary input #1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

4520 Type (Auxiliary input #1) 0 0 to 20 mA1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4560 Loss of signal action (Auxiliary input #1) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4590 Source (Auxiliary input #2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs

4600 Type (Auxiliary input #2) 0 0 to 20 mA1 4 to 30 mA2 0 to 10 V3 -10 to +10 V

4640 Loss of signal action (Auxiliary input #2) 0 Preset1 Maintain2 Stop

4662 Source (Analog output #1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs

4663 Output module type (Analog output #1) 0 Unipolar1 Bipolar

4666 Source (Analog output #2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs

4667 Output module type (Analog output #2) 0 Unipolar1 Bipolar

4670 Source (Analog output #3) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs

4671 Output module type (Analog output #3) 0 Unipolar1 Bipolar

4674 Source (Analog output #4) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs

4675 Output module type (Analog output #4) 0 Unipolar1 Bipolar

4678 Source (Analog output #5) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs

4679 Output module type (Analog output #5) 0 Unipolar1 Bipolar

4682 Source (Analog output #6) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual194 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 197: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4683 Output module type (Analog output #6) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4686 Source (Analog output #7) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4687 Output module type (Analog output #7) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4690 Source (Analog output #8) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4691 Output module type (Analog output #8) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4694 Source (Analog output #9) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4695 Output module type (Analog output #9) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4698 Source (Analog output #10) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4699 Output module type (Analog output #10) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4702 Source (Analog output #11) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4703 Output module type (Analog output #11) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4706 Source (Analog output #12) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4707 Output module type (Analog output #12) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4710 Source (Analog output #13) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4711 Output module type (Analog output #13) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4714 Source (Analog output #14) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4715 Output module type (Analog output #14) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4718 Source (Analog output #15) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4719 Output module type (Analog output #15) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar4722 Source (Analog output #16) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External

Analog Outputs4723 Output module type (Analog output #16) 0 Unipolar

1 Bipolar

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 195

Page 198: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4811 Comp 1 A in variable (Comparator 1 set‐

up)Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4812 Comp 1 B in variable (Comparator 1 set‐up)

4815 Compare 1 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4821 Comp 2 A in variable (Comparator 2 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4822 Comp 2 B in variable (Comparator 2 set‐up)

4825 Compare 2 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4831 Comp 3 A in variable (Comparator 3 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4832 Comp 3 B in variable (Comparator 3 set‐up)

4835 Compare 3 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4841 Comp 4 A in variable (Comparator 4 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4842 Comp 4 B in variable (Comparator 4 set‐up)

4845 Compare 4 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4851 Comp 5 A in variable (Comparator 5 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4852 Comp 5 B in variable (Comparator 5 set‐up)

4855 Compare 5 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4861 Comp 6 A in variable (Comparator 6 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4862 Comp 6 B in variable (Comparator 6 set‐up)

4865 Compare 6 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4871 Comp 7 A in variable (Comparator 7 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4872 Comp 7 B in variable (Comparator 7 set‐up)

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual196 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 199: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4875 Compare 7 type 0 Off

1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4881 Comp 8 A in variable (Comparator 8 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4882 Comp 8 B in variable (Comparator 8 set‐up)

4885 Compare 8 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4891 Comp 9 A in variable (Comparator 9 set‐up)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4892 Comp 9 B in variable (Comparator 9 set‐up)

4895 Compare 9 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4901 Comp 10 A in variable (Comparator 10 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4902 Comp 10 B in variable (Comparator 10 setup)

4905 Compare 10 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4911 Comp 11 A in variable (Comparator 11 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4912 Comp 11 B in variable (Comparator 11 setup)

4915 Compare 11 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4921 Comp 12 A in variable (Comparator 12 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4922 Comp 12 B in variable (Comparator 12 setup)

4925 Compare 12 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4931 Comp 13 A in variable (Comparator 13 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4932 Comp 13 B in variable (Comparator 13 setup)

4935 Compare 13 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 197

Page 200: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4941 Comp 14 A in variable (Comparator 14

setup)Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4942 Comp 14 B in variable (Comparator 14 setup)

4945 Compare 14 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4951 Comp 15 A in variable (Comparator 15 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4952 Comp 15 B in variable (Comparator 15 setup)

4955 Compare 15 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

4961 Comp 16 A in variable (Comparator 16 setup)

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compara‐tors

4962 Comp 16 B in variable (Comparator 16 setup)

4965 Compare 16 type 0 Off1 Signed compare2 Magnitude compare

5070 Show differences 0 No1 Yes

5080 Select language 0 English1 Italian2 Spanish3 French4 Portuguese5 German6 Chinese7 Russian

5081 Select language 0 English1 Italian2 Spanish3 French4 Portuguese5 German6 Chinese7 Russian

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual198 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 201: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String5201 Dummy for line 1 0 FRST

1 TLIM2 SPHS3 UVLT4 T OL5 F WK6 C OL7 NET18 NET29 ALIM10 EALM11 ENLM12 EMLM13 CIMB14 RLBK15 RGEN16 BRKG17 OVLT18 BYPS19 PRCH20 OLTM21 MODE22 CURP

5202 Dummy for line 2 0 NOMV1 INH2 OFF3 MAGN4 SPIN5 UXFR6 DXFR7 KYPD8 TEST9 LOS10 NET111 NET212 AUTO13 HAND14 BRAK15 DECL16 COAS17 TUNE18 FALT

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 199

Page 202: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String6255 Store In Event Log (Historic Log) 0 Off

1 On6260 Historic log variable 1 Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Historic Log

Variables6270 Historic log variable 26280 Historic log variable 36290 Historic log variable 46300 Historic log variable 56310 Historic log variable 66320 Historic log variable 77050 Transformer tap setting (input protect) 0 -5 %

1 0 %2 +5 %3 +10 %

7120 Auto reset enable (input protect) 0 No1 Yes

8001 Status Variable 1 (Meter menu) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Meter Sta‐tus Variables

8002 Status Variable 2 (Meter menu)8003 Status Variable 3 (Meter menu)8004 Status Variable 4 (Meter menu)8005 Status Variable 5 (Meter menu)8006 Status Variable 6 (Meter menu)8007 Status Variable 7 (Meter menu)8130 Output units (Hour Meter Setup) 0 English

1 Metric8150 Selection for HA (Input harmonics) 0 IA

1 IB2 IC3 VA4 VB5 VC

8200 Fault display override 0 Off1 On

9020 Serial port use 0 Local1 Modem2 Remote

9030 Flow Control (Serial port use) 0 None1 Xon/Xoff

9040 Baud rate (Serial port use) 0 96001 192002 384003 576004 115200

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual200 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 203: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String9047 Modbus Parity [Network 1] 0 None

1 Odd2 Even

9048 Modbus Stop Bits [Network 1] 0 One1 Two

9060 Modbus Baud Rate [Network 1] 0 12001 24002 48003 96004 19200

9080 Velocity Units [Network 1] 0 Percent1 RPM2 Hertz

9185 Multiple config files 0 OFF1 ON

9201 to 9232 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 1 Global Data]

Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for To Drive Communication Lists 9234 to 9265 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 2 Global

Data]9401 to 9464 Data From Drive 01 - 64 [Network 1 Reg‐

ister Data]Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for From Drive Communication Lists 9501 to 9564 Data From Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Regis‐

ter Data]9601 to 9664 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 1 Register

Data]Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for To Drive Communication Lists 9701 to 9764 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Register

Data]9801 to 9832 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 1 Global

Data]Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for From Drive Communication Lists 9834 to 9865 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 2 Global

Data]9901 Network 1 Type (Network 1 Configure) 0 None

1 Modbus2 DeviceNet3 ProfiBus5 Ethernet Modbus7 ControlNet

9905 DeviceNet Baud Rate [Network 1] 0 125 K1 250 K2 500 K

9911 Data Type [Network 1] 0 Integer1 Raw data

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 201

Page 204: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String9915

Network 2 Type (Network 2 Configure) 0 None1 Modbus2 DeviceNet3 ProfiBus5 Ethernet Modbus7 ControlNet

9917 Modbus Baud Rate [Network 2] 0 12001 24002 48003 96004 19200

9919 DeviceNet Baud Rate [Network 2] 0 125 K1 250 K2 500 K

9924 Velocity Units [Network 2] 0 Percent1 RPM2 Hertz

9925 Data Type [Network 2] 0 Integer1 Raw data

9928 Status / Control 0 Sop1 Fixed

9929 Status / Control 0 Sop1 Fixed

9944 Net Control Type 0 Sop1 Fixed

9945 Start Stop Control 0 Maintained1 Momentary

9947 Modbus Parity [Network 2] 0 None1 Odd2 Even

9948 Modbus Stop Bits [Network 2] 0 One1 Two

9951 Network 1 I/O Size 0 136 Bytes In/Out1 128 Bytes In/Out2 96 Bytes In/Out3 32 Bytes In/Out4 16 Bytes In/Out

9952 Network 2 I/O Size 0 136 Bytes In/Out1 128 Bytes In/Out2 96 Bytes In/Out3 32 Bytes In/Out4 16 Bytes In/Out

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual202 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 205: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String9953 Net 1 Swap Bytes [Profibus] 0 Off

1 On9954 Net 2 Swap Bytes [Profibus] 0 Off

1 On9956 Control Net Header [Network 1] 0 Off

1 On9957 Control Net Header [Network 2] 0 Off

1 On9958 Telegram Number [Network 1] 0 1

1 22 303 3524 9995 998

9959 Telegram Number [Network 2] 0 11 22 303 3524 9995 998

A.1.1 Internal Analog Outputs

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Analog OutputsID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String2846 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 1) 0 Motor Voltage2856 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 2) 1 Total Current 2 Average Power 3 Motor Speed 4 Speed Demand 5 Speed Reference 6 Raw Flux Demand 7 Flux Reference 8 Current (RMS) 9 Zero Sequence Av 10 Neg Sequence D 11 Neg Sequence Q 12 Input Frequency 13 Input Power Avg 14 Input Pwr Factor

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 203

Page 206: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 15 Ah Harmonic 16 Bh Harmonic 17 Total Harmonics 18 Xfmr Therm Level 19 1 Cycle Protect 20 Single Phase Cur 21 Under Volt Limit 22 Out Neutral Volts 23 Synch Motor Field 24 Motor Torque 25 Encoder Speed 26 Analog Input #1 27 Analog Input #2 28 Analog Input #3 29 Analog Input #4 30 Analog Input #5 31 Analog Input #6 32 Analog Input #7 33 Analog Input #8 34 Input KVAR 35 Drive Losses 36 Excess React Current 37 Speed Droop Percent 38 Torq Current (Iqs) Ref 39 Torq Current (Iqs) Fb 40 Torq Current (IqsFilt) Filtered

A.1.2 Internal Test Points

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Test PointsID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String2861 Analog variable (Int Test Point #28) 0 2866 Analog variable (Int Test Point #29) 1 Ids2871 Analog variable (Int Test Point #31) 2 Iqs2876 Analog variable (Int Test Point #24) 3 Ids reference2881 Analog variable (Int Test Point #25) 4 Iqs reference2886 Analog variable (Int Test Point #26) 5 Iqs reference filtered 6 Flux DS 7 Flux QS 8 Vds reference

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual204 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 207: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 9 Vqs reference 10 Output frequency 11 Slip frequency 12 Motor speed (frequency - slip) 13 Motor speed filtered 14 RLoss for braking 15 XLoss for braking 16 Field weakening limit 17 Dual Frequency Braking Limit 18 Maximum Current Limit 19 Minimum Current Limit 20 Iq gain 21 Ua reference 22 Ub reference 23 Uc reference 24 Uc reference 25 Flux Q loss filtered 26 Id loss filtered 27 Iq loss filtered 28 W loss 29 Ws filtered 30 Theta loss 31 Flux DS filtered 32 Ids filtered 33 Iqs filtered 34 Vd loss 35 Ids no load 36 Stator resistance 37 Wp reference 38 Output vector angle 39 Volt second phase A measurements 40 Volt second phase B measurements 41 Volt second phase C measurements 42 Ia current measurements 43 Ib current measurements 44 Ic current measurements 45 Ids measured current after synch filter (V/Hz) 46 Iqs measured current after synch filter (V/Hz) 47 Raw speed demand 48 Auxiliary demand before ramp 49 Auxiliary demand after ramp 50 Speed demand 51 Speed profile output

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 205

Page 208: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 52 Critical speed avoidance output 53 Polarity change output 54 Minimum demand output 55 Ramp output 56 Speed demand at limit input 57 Speed reference 58 Raw flux demand 59 Flux ramp output 60 Energy saver output 61 Field weakening output 62 Flux reference 63 Id input current 64 Iq input current 65 Phase A input current 66 Phase B input current 67 Phase C input current 68 Phase A input voltage 69 Phase B input voltage 70 Phase C input voltage 71 Zero sequence average 72 Negative sequence D voltage 73 Negative sequence Q voltage 74 D voltage 75 Q voltage 76 Input frequency 77 Input power average (kilowatts) 78 Input power factor 79 Ah harmonic coefficient 80 Bh harmonic coefficient 81 Transformer thermal level 82 One cycle reactive current level 83 Single phasing current level 84 Under Voltage level 85 Input side flux 86 Line Flux Vector Angle 87 Output Neutral Voltage 88 Sync Motor Field Current 89 Encoder Speed 90 Motor Voltage 91 Output Power Average (kilowatts) 92 Phase A filter current 93 Phase B filter current 94 Phase C filter current

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual206 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 209: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 95 Measured Phase A volts 96 Measured Phase B volts 97 Measured Phase C volts 98 Measured Output Neutral Voltage 99 Max Available Output Volts 100 Input Reactive Power (KVAR) 101 Drive Efficiency 102 Drive State 103 Up Transfer State 104 Down Transfer State 105 Drive Internal Losses 106 Excess Input Reactive Current 107 Speed Droop 108 Precharge State Variable 109 Precharge Voltage 110 Input Real Current 111 Input Reactive Current 112 AFE Reactive Current Reference 113 AFE Input Voltage Feed-forward 114 AFE Real Current Feed-forward 115 Input Id unfiltered 116 Input Iq unfiltered 117 AFE kVar 118 AFE kW 119 Maximum Demand Output 120 SMDC Mode state variable 121 Drive Loss Fault Limit 122 Torque ramp output 123 High Speed delay angle 124 Input Voltage Fundamental Magnitude 125 Disable Rollback active 126 Total Motor Current 127 Output Phase A Voltage RMS 128 Output Phase B Voltage RMS 129 Output Phase C Voltage RMS 130 Output Phase A Current RMS 131 Output Phase B Current RMS 132 Output Phase C Current RMS

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 207

Page 210: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.1.3 External Analog Inputs

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog InputsID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4105 Source (Analog input #1) 0 Off4175 Source (Analog input #2) 1 External 14223 Source (Analog input #3) 2 External 24333 Source (Analog input #4) 3 External 34342 Source (Analog input #5) 4 External 44510 Source (Auxiliary input #1) 5 External 54590 Source (Auxiliary input #2) 6 External 6 7 External 7 8 External 8 9 External 9 10 External 10 11 External 11 12 External 12 13 External 13 14 External 14 15 External 15 16 External 16 17 External 17 18 External 18 19 External 19 20 External 20 21 External 21 22 External 22 23 External 23 24 External 24 25 Int AI1 26 Int AI2 27 Int Ai3

A.1.4 External Analog Outputs

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog OutputsID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4662 Source (Analog output #1) 0 Motor Voltage4666 Source (Analog output #2) 1 Total Current

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual208 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 211: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4670 Source (Analog output #3) 2 Average Power4674 Source (Analog output #4) 3 Motor Speed 4678 Source (Analog output #5) 4 Speed Demand4682 Source (Analog output #6) 5 Speed Reference4686 Source (Analog output #7) 6 Raw Flux Demand4690 Source (Analog output #8) 7 Flux Reference4604 Source (Analog output #9) 8 Current (RMS)4698 Source (Analog output #10) 9 Zero Sequence Av4702 Source (Analog output #11) 10 Neg Sequence D4706 Source (Analog output #12) 11 Neg Sequence Q4710 Source (Analog output #13) 12 Input Frequency4714 Source (Analog output #14) 13 Input Power Avg4718 Source (Analog output #15) 14 Input Pwr Factor4722 Source (Analog output #16) 15 Ah Harmonic 16 Bh Harmonic 17 Total Harmonics 18 Xfmr Therm Level 19 1 Cycle Protect 20 Single Phase Cur 21 Under Volt Limit 22 Out Neutral Volts 23 Synch Motor Field 24 Motor Torque 25 Encoder Speed 26 Analog Input #1 27 Analog Input #2 28 Analog Input #3 29 Analog Input #4 30 Analog Input #5 31 Analog Input #6 32 Analog Input #7 33 Analog Input #8 34 Input KVAR 35 Drive Losses 36 Excess React Current 37 Speed Droop Percent 38 Torq Current (Iqs) Ref 39 Torq Current (Iqs) Fb 40 Torq Current (IqsFilt) Filtered

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 209

Page 212: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.1.5 Comparators

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for ComparatorsID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String4811 Comp 1 A in variable 0 Manual Value4812 Comp 1 B in variable 1 Anl 14821 Comp 2 A in variable 2 Anl 24822 Comp 2 B in variable 3 Anl 34831 Comp 3 A in variable 4 Anl 44832 Comp 3 B in variable 5 Anl 54841 Comp 4 A in variable 6 Anl 64842 Comp 4 B in variable 7 Anl 74851 Comp 5 A in variable 8 Anl 84852 Comp 5 B in variable 9 Anl 94861 Comp 6 A in variable 10 Anl 104862 Comp 6 B in variable 11 Anl 114871 Comp 7 A in variable 12 Anl 124872 Comp 7 B in variable 13 Anl 134881 Comp 8 A in variable 14 Anl 144882 Comp 8 B in variable 15 Anl 154891 Comp 9 A in variable 16 Anl 164892 Comp 9 B in variable 17 Anl 174901 Comp 10 A in variable 18 Anl 184902 Comp 10 B in variable 19 Anl 194911 Comp 11 A in variable 20 Anl 204912 Comp 11 B in variable 21 Anl 214921 Comp 12 A in variable 22 Anl 224922 Comp 12 B in variable 23 Anl 234931 Comp 13 A in variable 24 Anl 244932 Comp 13 B in variable 25 Mtr Spd4941 Comp 14 A in variable 26 Mtr Cur4942 Comp 14 B in variable 27 Max Avail Out Vlt4951 Comp 15 A in variable 28 IdsRef4952 Comp 15 B in variable 29 Ids4961 Comp 16 A in variable 30 IqsRef4962 Comp 16 B in variable 31 Iqs 32 Input Freq 33 Manual Id 34 Int AI1 35 Int AI2 36 Int AI3

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual210 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 213: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.1.6 Historic Log Variables

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Historic Log VariablesID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String6260 Historic log variable 1 0 Motor speed6270 Historic log variable 2 1 Speed Reference6280 Historic log variable 3 2 Raw Speed Demand6290 Historic log variable 4 3 Torque Current Command6300 Historic log variable 5 4 Torque Current Feedback 6310 Historic log variable 6 5 Magnetizing Current Command6320 Historic log variable 7 6 Magnetizing Current Feedback 7 Total Motor Current 8 Motor Voltage 9 Motor Flux 10 Line Voltage Available 11 Line Voltage RMS 12 Output Power 13 Output Neutral Volts 14 Total Input Current 15 Input Power 16 Input Frequency 17 Input KVAR 18 Excessive Drive Losses 19 Excessive Reactive Current 20 Speed Droop Percent 21 Output Frequency PU

A.1.7 Meter Status Variables

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Meter Status VariablesID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String8001 Status Variable 1 (Meter menu) 0 Mag current ref (A)8002 Status Variable 2 (Meter menu) 1 Trq current ref (A)8003 Status Variable 3 (Meter menu) 2 Flux DS (%)8004 Status Variable 4 (Meter menu) 3 Flux QS (%)8005 Status Variable 5 (Meter menu) 4 Vds reference (%)8006 Status Variable 6 (Meter menu) 5 Vqs reference (%)8007 Status Variable 7 (Meter menu) 6 Slip frequency (%) 7 Motor speed (%)

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 211

Page 214: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 8 Output Frequency (Hz) 9 Motor speed (RPM) 10 Motor voltage (V) 11 Mag current filtered (A) 12 Trq current filtered (A) 13 Motor current (A) 14 Torque out (%) 15 Output power (KW) 16 Stator resistance 17 Speed demand (%) 18 Speed reference (%) 19 Raw flux demand (%) 20 Flux reference (%) 21 Id input current (A) 22 Iq input current (A) 23 Phase A input current (A) 24 Phase B input current (A) 25 Phase C input current (A) 26 Total input current (A) 27 Phase A input voltage (V) 28 Phase B input voltage (V) 29 Phase C input voltage (V) 30 Zero sequence voltage (V) 31 Negative sequence D voltage (V) 32 Negative sequence Q voltage (V) 33 Input D voltage (V) 34 Input Q voltage (V) 35 Input voltage (V) 36 Input frequency (Hz) 37 Input power average (KW) 38 Input power factor (%) 39 Ah harmonic coefficient (%) 40 Bh harmonic coefficient (%) 41 Total A, B harmonics (%) 42 Transformer thermal level (%) 43 One cycle reactive current level (%) 44 Single phasing current level (%) 45 Under Voltage level (%) 46 Efficiency (%) 47 Total Harmonic Distortion (%) 48 Output Neutral Voltage (V) 49 Output Neutral Voltage (%) 50 Synch Motor Field Current (A)

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual212 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 215: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 51 Encoder Speed (%) 52 Encoder Speed (RPM) 53 Phase A filter current (A) 54 Phase B filter current (A) 55 Phase C filter current (A) 56 Measured Phase A volts (V) 57 Measured Phase B volts (V) 58 Measured Phase C volts (V) 59 Measured Output Neutral Voltage (V) 60 Max Avail Output Volts (%) 61 Input Avg Reactive Power (KVAR) 62 Excessive Drive Losses (KW) 63 Excessive Reactive current (A) 64 Up Transfer State value 65 Down Transfer State value 66 Speed Droop (%)

A.1.8 To Drive Communication

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for To Drive CommunicationID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String9201 to 9232 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 1 Global Data] 0 Velocity Demand 9234 to 9265 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 2 Global Data] 1 Auxiliary Demand 9601 to 9664 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 1 Register Data] 2 Net Input Flag 1 9701 to 9764 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Register Data] 3 Net Input Flag 2 4 Net Input Flag 3 5 Net Input Flag 4 6 Ratio 7 Forward Max Lim 8 Reverse Max Lim 9 Forward Acc Time 10 Forward Dec Time 11 Reverse Acc Time 12 Reverse Dec Time 13 Net Input Pulse 14 Forward Min Lim 15 Reverse Min Lim 16 Torque Limit 17 MUX1 Id 18 MUX2 Id

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 213

Page 216: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 19 MUX3 Id 20 MUX4 Id 21 MUX5 Id 22 MUX6 Id 23 MUX7 Id 24 MUX8 Id 25 PTD1 26 PTD2 27 PTD3 28 PTD4 29 Parallel Cmd 1 30 Torque Demand 31 PVCL Demand 32 Flux Demand 33 Node Count 34 Node Index 35 Torque Acc Time 36 Torque Dec Time 37 Torque Offset 38 Torque Scalar 39 Vars Command 40 No Load I Scalar 41 Avg Field Cur 42 Manual Ids Demand

A.1.9 From Drive Communication

Menu Parameter Pick List Values for From Drive CommunicationID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String9401 to 9464 Data From Drive 01 - 64 [Network 1 Register Data] 0 None 9501 to 9564 Data From Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Register Data] 1 Man Id 9801 to 9832 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 1 Global Data] 2 General Status 9834 to 9865 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 2 Global Data] 3 Motor Voltage 4 Total Current 5 Output Power 6 Motor Speed 7 Speed Demand 8 Speed Reference 9 Heartbeat 10 Drive State

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual214 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 217: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 11 Inp RMS Current 12 Input Frequency 13 Input Power Avg 14 Net1 Out Reg 1 15 Net1 Out Reg 2 16 Net1 Out Reg 3 17 Net1 Out Reg 4 18 Net2 Out Reg 1 19 Net2 Out Reg 2 20 Net2 Out Reg 3 21 Net2 Out Reg 4 22 Torque Current 23 Magnetizing Cur 24 Motor Flux 25 Motor Torque 26 Flux Reference 27 Input Voltage 28 Inp Power Factor 29 Input KVars 30 Max Available Output Volts 31 Hottest Cell Temp 32 Mux1 Echo 33 Mux1 Data 34 Mux2 Echo 35 Mux2 Data 36 Mux3 Echo 37 Mux3 Data 38 Mux4 Echo 39 Mux4 Data 40 Mux5 Echo 41 Mux5 Data 42 Mux6 Echo 43 Mux6 Data 44 Mux7 Echo 45 Mux7 Data 46 Mux8 Echo 47 Mux8 Data 48 Wago Inputs 1-16 49 Wago Inputs 17-32 50 Wago Inputs 33-48 51 Wago Inputs 49-64 52 Wago Inputs 65-80 53 Wago Inputs 81-96

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 215

Page 218: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String 54 Wago Outputs 1-16 55 Wago Outputs 17-32 56 Wago Outputs 33-48 57 Wago Outputs 49-64 58 PFD1 59 PFD2 60 PFD3 61 PFD4 62 Drive Losses 63 Excessive Reactive Current 64 Speed Droop Percent 65 Sync Motor Field Ref 66 Avail Reactive Current 67 Drive Efficiency

AppendixA.1 Menu Parameter Pick-list IDs

NXGPro+ Communication Manual216 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 219: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.2 Display Network Monitor

DescriptionUse parameter 'Display Network Monitor' (9950) to view the values of network registers. This is useful for troubleshooting. As data is transmitted, and the values of the registers change, the display automatically updates to reflect the changes.

NoteThe direction of data transmission shown on the screen is displayed as seen by the drive, meaning that:• Rx refers to data received into the drive• Tx refers to data transmitted from the drive.

Figure A-1 Display Network Monitor Function

1 Format of the register value dis‐play

D = decimal formatH = hexadecimal format

2 Network for this register The drive may be connected to 2 separate networks:• NET 1• NET 2

3 Data direction Rx = Data to Drive registerTx = Data from Drive register

4 Global or non-global register G = global registerN = non-global register

5 Register number 2-digit numeric field that indicates the number of the register being shown.• Tx 01-64 = Data from Drive 01 (ID 9401) to Data

from Drive 64 (ID 9464)• Rx 01-64 = Data to Drive 01 (ID 9601) to Data to

Drive 64 (ID 9664)6 Register value The value of the register. Since the registers all contain

16-bit digital words, they range in value from 0-65535 (decimal), or 0-FFFF (hexadecimal).

AppendixA.2 Display Network Monitor

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 217

Page 220: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

7 Line 1 data Line 1 in the example diagram provides the following information:• register value in decimal format• register is in network 1• data is going to the drive• register is non-global • register is number 1• register value is 257

8 Line 2 data Line 2 in the example diagram provides the following information:• register value in hexadecimal format• register is in network 2• data is coming from the drive• register is non-global• register is number 2• register value is 0xF1B

NoteThe only network that supports global data is Modbus™ Plus.All other networks do not support global data for the global or non-global register.

Editing Values in the DisplayUnderscores on the display (as shown in the previous figure) indicate that values can be edited in these areas.To edit values in the display:• Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor horizontally.• Use the up and down arrow keys to edit alphabetical fields.• Use the up and down arrow keys or the numeric keys to edit numerical fields.• To move the cursor to the second line, continue pressing the right arrow key after reaching

the end of the first line.• To move the cursor back to the first line, continue pressing the right arrow key after reaching

the end of the second line.• Use the left arrow key in the same manner to move the cursor in the opposite direction.

AppendixA.2 Display Network Monitor

NXGPro+ Communication Manual218 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 221: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.3 Parameter Read / Write

A.3.1 IntroductionThe 'parameter read/write' function allows you to use a PLC to read and write parameter values in the drive. The following registers are available:• Parameters To Drive (PTD)

Use these registers to read and write parameter commands, read and write pick list items, and execute certain functions.

• Parameters From Drive (PFD)Use these registers to echo the PTD command, hold the PTD read command results, and produce an error code if the PTD command cannot be performed.

A.3.2 Setting up the PTD and PFD registersThe following menus and submenus provide access for setting up the PFD and PTD registers:• Communications Menu (9)• Submenu Network 1 Configure (9900)• Submenu Network 2 Configure (9914)Select PFD and PTD registers using the pick lists listed in the Planning/Configuring Chapter. The pick lists include the available registers as follows:• Data from Drive registers for use in IDs 9403 to 9464:

– PFD1– PFD2– PFD3– PFD4

• Data to Drive registers for use in IDs 9603 to 9664:– PTD1– PTD2– PTD3– PTD4

NotePlace each set of 4 registers in sequential IDs. Each register performs a specific function.

AppendixA.3 Parameter Read / Write

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 219

Page 222: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.3.3 Defining the PFD RegistersThe PFD registers are defined in the following table, which provides all possible contents of the PFD registers. The PFD1 register consists of 16 bits as described in the table.

Table A-2 Contents of PFD Registers 1 to 4PFD Register Register Function Bit DescriptionPFD1 Status 0 to 6 Echo of Command from PTD

7 Error Flag:• If Bit 7 is not set (0), Bits 8 to 15 represent the exponent, i.e.

number of decimal digits.• If Bit 7 is set (1), Bits 8 to 15 contain the error codes listed

below.8 to 15 Error code and description:

• 0 Not used• 1 Invalid ID• 2 Limit Error• 3 Drive is running. Cannot change value.• 4 Parameter/pick list write Lockout (drive does allow pa‐

rameter changes).• 5 ID is parameter type. Use parameter commands.• 6 ID is a pick list type. Use pick list commands.• 7 Command Error: Use write pick list Manual ID Command• 8 Command Error: Use write pick list command• 9 Invalid Manual ID• 10 Fixed Pick List (item is read only)• 11 Pick List Item Already Selected• 12 Invalid Function ID• 13 to 255 Reserved for Future Use

PFD2 Menu ID Echo N/a Menu ID echo for the required commandPFD3 Read Value N/a Value returned from read parameter value command for Least

Significant 16-Bits.If the value is numeric, this register contains the least significant 16 bits.If the value is a Read String, this register contains the first 2 bytes.

PFD4 Read Exponent N/a Value returned from read parameter value command for Most Significant 16-Bits.If the value is numeric, this register contains the most significant 16 bits.If the value is a Read String, this register contains the second 2 bytes.

AppendixA.3 Parameter Read / Write

NXGPro+ Communication Manual220 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 223: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.3.4 Defining the PTD RegistersThe PTD registers are defined in the following table, which provides all possible contents of the PTD registers. The PTD1 register can have a value of 0 to 127 for various commands as described in the table.

Table A-3 Contents of PTD Registers 1 to 4PTD Register Register Function Value DescriptionPTD1: Bits 0 to 7 ID Command

0 No Operation1 Read ID Type:

• 0 = Parameter• 1 = Pick List Item• 2 = Pick List with Manual ID (Manual ID Not Selected)• 3 = Pick List with Manual ID (Manual ID Currently Selected)• 4 = Function

2 Read Next ID3 Read ID Minimum Value4 Read ID Maximum Value5 Read ID String Length6 to 11 Read ID String (4 bytes per command)12 Read ID Security Level (0, 5, 7)13 Write ID Security Level (0, 5, 7)14 Read ID Default Value15 Read ID Default Used (0 = No, 1 = Yes)16 to 20 Reserved for Future Use

Parameter Command

21 Read Parameter Value22 Write Parameter Value23 Read Units Text Length24 Read Units String (Bytes 1-40)25 Read IP Address26 Write IP Address27 to 30 Reserved for Future Use

Pick List Command

31 Read Pick List Item32 Write Pick List Item (Not Using Drive ID)33 Write Pick List Item (Using Drive ID)34 Read Pick List Text Length35 to 40 Read Pick List String (4 Bytes per Command)

Function Command(refer to table below for supported IDs)

41 Perform Function42 to 47 Read Function String (4 Bytes per Command)

Reserved 48 to 127 Reserved for Future UsePTD1: Bits 8 to 11 Exponent N/a Exponent to be used for Write Parameter Value commandPTD2 Menu ID N/a Menu ID for the required command

AppendixA.3 Parameter Read / Write

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 221

Page 224: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

PTD Register Register Function Value DescriptionPTD3 Write Value N/a Value to be used for write parameter value command for Least

Significant 16-BitsPTD4 Write Value N/a Value to be used for write parameter value command for Most

Significant 16-Bits

The following table lists the available ID Function commands for use when PTD1 is set to a "Function command" (value 41).The table also lists the PTD and PFD usage for each parameter function.

Table A-4 Available ID Function CommandsParameter ID Function PTD Use PFD Use1260 Autotune Stage1 Not used Not used1270 Autotune Stage2 Not used Not used2640 Reset Bypassed Cells Not used Not used3510 Start Control Loop Test Not used Not used3520 Stop Control Loop Test Not used Not used5045 Set Current As Default Not used • PFD3: 1 = Error

• PFD4: Not used5050 Reset to Defaults Not used Not used6200 Clear Event Log Not used Not used6240 Alarm/Fault Log Clear Not used • PFD3: 1 = Error

• PFD4: Not used8030 Preset Hour Meter • PTD3 = Value

• PTD4 = ExponentNot used

8040 Reset Hour Meter Not used Not used8060 Alarm/Fault Log Clear • PTD3 = Value

• PTD4 = ExponentNot used

8070 Reset Output KWH Meter Not used Not used8074 Preset Input KWH Meter • PTD3 = Value

• PTD4 = ExponentNot used

8076 Reset Input KWH Meter Not used Not used

AppendixA.3 Parameter Read / Write

NXGPro+ Communication Manual222 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 225: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Parameter ID Function PTD Use PFD Use8080 Set the Clock Time • PTD3:

– Seconds (0-59)– Minutes (0-59)– Hours (0-23)– Days– Month (1-12)– Year (1999-2099)

• PTD4:– 0 – 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5

Not used. Invalid combinations of PTD3/PTD4 return a "Limit Error" in PFD1.

8090 Display Version Number (Soft‐ware Release Version)

Not used • PFD3:– Bits 0-3: Incremental release

number (if >0)– Bits 4-7: Minor Revision– Bits 8-11: Major Revision– Bits 12-15: Not used

• PFD4: Not used in released ver‐sions

9140* Display Sys Prog Name Not used PFD3: String Length9147* Display Drctry Version Not used PFD3: String Length9195* Show Active Config File Not used PFD3: String Length9946 Net 1 to 2 Reg. Copy Not used Not used

* IDs that support the use of the function string commands (PTD1 values 42-47).

A.3.5 PLC handshaking procedure for parameter read/write

Register SetupUse the following procedure to enter and change parameter data in PTD and PFD registers:1. Write the register data into PTD3 and PTD4 for commands that require PLC data.2. Write the parameter ID into the PTD2 register.3. Poll until PFD2 register value equals PTD2 register value (menu ID echo).4. Write the command type into the PTD1 register.5. Perform handshake: Poll until the lower 7 bits (0-6) in the PFD1 register are equal to the value

in the PTD1 register (command echo).

AppendixA.3 Parameter Read / Write

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 223

Page 226: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

6. Error testing: – Test bit 7 of PFD1 (command echo flag).– If bit 7 is set, the upper byte of PFD1 is the error code.– If bit 7 is clear, the upper byte of PFD1 contains the 4-bit exponent for the data if the

command was "Read Parameter Value." For all other commands, the upper byte is zero.7. Read data: Read register data in PFD3 and PFD4 (commands that return PCD data).8. End the command: Write zero into the PTD1 register (reset the command).

Example: Changing Parameter 'Rated input voltage' (2010)To change parameter 'Rated input voltage' (2010) to 3000, proceed as follows:1. Write 3000 to PTD3. This is the new voltage.

PTD4 is not needed.2. Write 2010 to PTD2. This is the parameter ID for rated input voltage.3. Poll PFD2 until its value equals 2010 (the value of PTD2).4. Write 22 to PTD1. This is the Write Parameter Value command.5. Poll bits 0 to 6 of PTD1 until the value equals 22 (the value of PTD1).6. When PFD2 equals PTD2 and the lower 6 bits of PFD1 equal PTD1, test bit 7 of PFD1.

– If bit 7 of PFD1 is not set, read bits 8 to 11 for the exponent.– If bit 7 of PFD1 is set, read bits 8 to 15 for the error code.

7. Read PFD3 and PFD4 for the new value.8. Write 0 to PTD1.

AppendixA.3 Parameter Read / Write

NXGPro+ Communication Manual224 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 227: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

A.4 Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers

DescriptionMultiplexer (MUX) data registers are used when a PLC needs to read more registers than the number of built in 'Data from Drive' registers, which is 64.The drive has 8 MUX registers. Each MUX register uses: • 1 'Data to Drive' register• 2 'Data from Drive' registers.The MUX data can access any manual ID register from the drive. Using MUX data registers requires "handshaking" to take place between the PLC and the drive. MUX data allows the PLC to access more than 64 registers worth of data but at a slower rate.

Setup Procedure1. Set one of the 62 programmable 'Data from Drive' registers to "Mux1 Data".2. Set one of the 62 programmable 'Data from Drive' registers to "Mux1 Echo".3. Set one of the 62 programmable 'Data to Drive' registers to "Mux1 Id".4. Repeat the steps above to use additional MUX registers (Mux2 to Mux8).

OperationThe handshaking operates in the following way:• The PLC writes a manual ID number into the "Mux1 Id" register.• The PLC polls the "Mux1 Echo" register until the manual ID set in the "Mux1 Id" register is

present in the "Mux1 Echo" register.• The PLC reads the data from the "Mux1 Data" register. The data is the value for the manual ID.

AppendixA.4 Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 225

Page 228: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

AppendixA.4 Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers

NXGPro+ Communication Manual226 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 229: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Symbols and Abbreviations BThis appendix contains a list of symbols and abbreviations commonly used throughout this manual group.

Table B-1 Commonly Used AbbreviationsAbbreviation Meaning• Boolean AND function+ Addition or Boolean OR function∑ Summationµ MicrosecondA Amp, AmpereAC Alternating Currentaccel AccelerationA/D Analog-to-digital (converter)AI Analog InputAlg AnalogAP Advanced protocol for cell communicationavail AvailableBTU British thermal unitsC Centigrade or Capacitorcap CapacitorCCB Cell Control Boardccw Counter clockwiseCE Formerly European Conformity, now true definitionCFM Cubic Feet per MinuteCLVC Closed Loop Vector Controlcmd Commandcom Commonconn ConnectorCPS Control Power SupplyCPU Central Processing UnitCSMC Closed Loop Synchronous Motor ControlCT Current Transformercu Cubiccurr, I Currentcw ClockwiseD Derivative (PID), depthD/A Digital-to-analog (converter)db DecibelDC Direct Current

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 227

Page 230: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Abbreviation MeaningDCR Digital Control RackDCS Distributed Control Systemdecel Decelerationdeg, ° DegreesDiv Divisiondmd Demande ErrorELV Extra Low VoltageEMC Electromagnetic CompatibilityEMF Electromotive ForceEMI Electromagnetic InterferenceEPS Encoder Power SupplyESD Electrostatic DischargeESP Electrical Submersible PumpESTOP, e-stop Emergency Stopfb, fdbk Feedbackffwd Feed ForwardFLC Full Load Currentfreq Frequencyft, ' Feetfwd Forwardgnd GroundGUI Graphical User InterfaceH Heighthex Hexadecimalhist HistoricHp Horsepowerhr HourHVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air ConditioningHVF Harmonic Voltage FactorHz HertzI Integral (PID)ID IdentificationIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionIEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersIGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar TransistorIn InputIn, " InchesINH InhibitI/O Input(s)/Output(s)IOC Instantaneous OvercurrentIP Input Protectionk 1,000 (e.g., Kohm)

Symbols and Abbreviations

NXGPro+ Communication Manual228 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 231: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Abbreviation MeaningkHz KiloHertzkV Kilo VoltskVA One Thousand Volt AmpskW KilowattL InductorLAN Local Area NetworkLbs Pounds (weight)LCD Liquid Crystal Displayld LoadLED Light-emitting DiodeLFR Latch Fault RelayLOTO Lock-Out-Tag-OutLim LimitLOS Loss Of Signallps Liters Per SecondmA Milliamperesmag Magnetizingmax MaximumMCC Motor Control CenterMg MilligramMin Minimum, Minutemsec Millisecond(S)Msl Mean Sea LevelMV Medium Voltagemvlt Motor VoltageMW MegawattNC Normally ClosedNEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s AssociationNO Normally OpenNVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access MemoryNXG Next Generation ControlNXGpro Next Generation Control proNXGpro+ Next Generation Control pro PlusOLVC Open Loop Vector ControlO-M OvermodulationOOS Out of Saturation (IGBT)overld OverloadP Proportional (PID)Pa Pascalspb Push ButtonPC Personal Computer or Printed CircuitPCB Printed Circuit BoardPID Proportional Integral Derivative

Symbols and Abbreviations

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 229

Page 232: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Abbreviation MeaningPLC Programmable Logic ControllerPLL Phase Locked Looppot Potentiometerpp Peak-to-peakppm Parts per MillionPPR Pulses per RevolutionPQM Power Quality MeterProToPSTM Process Tolerant Protection StrategyPSDBP Power Spectral Density Break PointPSI Pounds Per Square InchPSIG Pounds Per Square Inch GaugePSID Pounds Per Square Inch Differentialpt PointPT Potential TransformerPWM Pulse Width ModulationQ1,Q2,Q3,Q4 Output Transistor Designationsrad RadiansRAM Random Access Memoryref Referencerev Reverse, Revolution(S)RFI Radio Frequency InterferenceRLBK Rollbackrms Root-mean-squaredRPM Revolutions Per MinuteRTD Resistance Temperature DetectorRTU Remote Terminal UnitRX Receive (RS232 Communications)s Second(s)SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifiersec Second(s)ser SerialSIB System Interface BoardSMC Synchronous Motor ControlSOP Sum of Products; System Operating Programspd Speedstab Stabilitystd Standardsw SwitchT1, T2 Output Terminals TI and T2TB Terminal BlockTBD To Be DeterminedTCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTHD Total Harmonic Distortion

Symbols and Abbreviations

NXGPro+ Communication Manual230 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 233: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Abbreviation MeaningTOL Thermal OverloadTP Test Pointtrq, τ TorqueTX Transmit (RS232 Communications)UPS Uninterruptable Power SupplyV Voltage, VoltsVA Volt-AmperesVAC Volts ACvar VariableVDC Volts DCvel Velocity (speed)VFD Variable Frequency DriveV/Hz Volts per Hertzvlts Voltage(s), VoltsW Width, WattsWAGO Expansion I/O System (brand name)xfmr, xformer Transformer

Symbols and Abbreviations

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 231

Page 234: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Symbols and Abbreviations

NXGPro+ Communication Manual232 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 235: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Glossary

ANDAND is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if all of the inputs are true in SOP notation, AND is represented as "∗" (e.g., C=A∗B), although sometimes it may be omitted between operands with the AND operation being implied (e.g., C=AB).

ASCIIASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange, a set of 8-bit computer codes used for the representation of text.

Baud rateBaud rate is a measure of the switching speed of a line, representing the number of changes of state of the line per second. The baud rate of the serial port is selected through the Baud Rate parameter in the Communications Menu [9].

BitBit is an acronym for BInary digiT. Typically, bits are used to indicate either a true (1) or false (0) state within the drive’s programming.

Boolean algebraA form of mathematical rules developed by the mathematician George Boole used in the design of digital and logic systems.

Carrier frequencyCarrier frequency is the set switching frequency of the power devices (IGBTs) in the power section of each cell. The carrier frequency is measured in cycles per second (Hz).

Catch a spinning load"Catch a spinning load" is a feature that can be used with high-inertia loads (e.g., fans), in which the drive may attempt to turn on while the motor is already turning. This feature can be enabled via the control menu system.

CLVCAn acronym for Closed Loop Vector Control, one of the control modes in the drive. This is flux vector control for an induction machine (IM), utilizing an encoder for speed feedback.

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 233

Page 236: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

CMP Refer to the glossary term SOP.

ComparatorA comparator is a device that compares 2 quantities and determines their equality. The comparator submenus allow the programmer to specify two variables to be compared. The results of the custom comparison operations can be used in the system program.

Configuration Updatesee Tool Suite definition.

ConverterThe converter is the component of the drive that changes AC voltage to DC voltage.

Critical speed avoidanceCritical speed avoidance is a feature that allows the operator to program up to 3 mechanical system frequencies that the drive will "skip over" during its operation.

CSMCAn acronym for Closed Loop Synchronous Machine (SM) Control, one of the control modes of the drive. This is a flux vector control for a synchronous machine, utilizing an encoder for speed feedback and providing a field excitation command for use by an external field exciter.

DC linkThe DC link is a large capacitor bank between the converter and inverter section of the drive. The DC link, along with the converter, establishes the voltage source for the inverter.

De Morgan’s TheoremThe duality principal of Boolean algebra used to convert system logic equations into sum-of-products notation.

Debug Toolsee Tool Suite definition.

DownloadingDownloading is a process by which information is transmitted from a remote device (such as a PC) to the drive. The term "downloading" implies the transmission of an entire file of information (e.g., the system program) rather than continued interactive communications between the two

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication Manual234 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 237: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

devices. The use of a PC for downloading requires special serial communications software to be available on the PC, which may link to the drive via RS232 or through the Host Simulator via an ethernet connection.

DRCTRYDirectory file for system tokens and flags used in the compilation of system programs. It provides a direct lookup table of ASCII names to internal ID numbers. It also identifies whether the flag is a word or bit-field, and also whether it can be used as an input or output only, or can be used for both.

DriveThe term "drive" refers to the power conversion equipment that converts utility power into power for a motor in a controlled manner.

ELVELV is an acronym for extra low voltage, and represents any voltage not exceeding a limit that is generally accepted to be 50 VAC and 120 VDC (ripple free).

EMC EMC is an acronym for electromagnetic compatibility–the ability of equipment to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.

ESDESD is an acronym for ElectroStatic Discharge. ESD is an undesirable electrical side effect that occurs when static charges build up on a surface and are discharged to another. When printed circuit boards are involved, impaired operation and component damage are possible side effects due to the static-sensitive nature of the PC board components. These side effects may manifest themselves as intermittent problems or total component failures. It is important to recognize that these effects are cumulative and may not be obvious.

Fault logFault messages are saved to memory so that the operator may view them at a later time. This memory location is called the fault log. The fault log lists both fault and alarm messages, the date and time that they occurred, and the time and date that they are reset.

FaultsFaults are error conditions that have occurred in the system. The severity of faults vary. Likewise, the treatment or corrective action for a fault may vary from changing a parameter value to replacing a hardware component such as a fuse.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 235

Page 238: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Flash CardNon-volatile memory storage device for the control. It stores the drive program, system program, logs, parameters, and other related drive files.

FPGAField Programmable Gate Array. An FPGA is an integrated circuit that contains thousands of logic gates.

FunctionA function is one of four components found in the menu system. Functions are built-in programs that perform specific tasks. Examples of functions include System Program Upload/Download and Display System Program Name.

HarmonicsHarmonics are undesirable AC currents or voltages at integer multiples of the fundamental frequency. The fundamental frequency is the lowest frequency in the wave form (generally the repetition frequency). Harmonics are present in any non-sinusoidal wave form and cannot transfer power on average.Harmonics arise from non-linear loads in which current is not strictly proportional to voltage. Linear loads like resistors, capacitors, and inductors do not produce harmonics. However, non-linear devices such as diodes and silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) do generate harmonic currents. Harmonics are also found in uninterruptable power supplies (UPSs), rectifiers, transformers, ballasts, welders, arc furnaces, and personal computers.

Hexadecimal digitsHexadecimal (or "hex") digits are the "numerals" used to represent numbers in the base 16 (hex) number system. Unlike the more familiar decimal system, which uses the numerals 0 through 9 to make numbers in powers of 10, the base 16 number system uses the numerals 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F to make numbers in powers of 16.

Historic logThe historic log is a troubleshooting/diagnostic tool of the control. The historic log continuously logs drive status, including the drive state, internal fault words, and multiple user-selectable variables. This information is sampled every slow loop cycle of the control (typically 450 to 900 times per second). If a fault occurs, the log is frozen a predefined number of samples after the fault event, and data samples prior to and after the fault condition are recorded to allow post-fault analysis. The number of samples recorded are user-selectable via the control, as well as the option to record the historic log within the VFD event log.

Host Simulatorsee Tool Suite definition.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication Manual236 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 239: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

I/OI/O is an acronym for input/output. I/O refers to any and all inputs and outputs connected to a computer system. Both inputs and outputs can be classified as analog (e.g., input power, drive output, meter outputs, etc.) or digital (e.g., contact closures or switch inputs, relay outputs, etc.).

IGBTIGBT is an acronym for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors. IGBTs are semiconductors that are used in the drive to provide reliable, high-speed switching, high-power capabilities, improved control accuracy, and reduced motor noise.

Induction motorAn induction motor is an AC motor that produces torque by the reaction between a varying magnetic field (generated in the stator) and the current induced in the coils of the rotor.

Intel hexIntel hex refers to a file format in which records consist of ASCII format hexadecimal (base 16) numbers with load address information and error checking embedded.

InverterThe inverter is a portion of the drive that changes DC voltage into AC voltage. The term "inverter" is sometimes used mistakenly to refer to the entire drive (the converter, DC link, and inverter sections).

Jog modeJog mode is an operational mode that uses a pre-programmed jog speed when a digital input (programmed as the jog mode input) is closed.

JumpersJumper blocks are groups of pins that can control functions of the system, based on the state of the jumpers. Jumpers (small, removable connectors) are either installed (on) or not installed (off) to provide a hardware switch.

Ladder logic (Also Ladder Diagram)A graphical representation of logic in which two vertical lines, representing power, flow from the source on the left and the sink on the right, with logic branches running between, resembling rungs of a ladder. Each branch consists of various labeled contacts placed in series and connected to a single relay coil (or function block) on the right.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 237

Page 240: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Loss of signal featureThe loss of signal feature is a control scheme that gives the operator the ability to select one of three possible actions in the event that the signal from an external sensor, configured to specify the speed demand, is lost. Under this condition, the operator may program the drive (through the system program) to (1) revert to a fixed, pre-programmed speed, (2) maintain the current speed, or (3) perform a controlled (ramped) stop of the drive. By default, current speed is maintained.

LVDLVD is an acronym for Low Voltage Directive, a safety directive in the EU.

Lvl RHThis term refers the two security fields associated with each parameter of the system. These fields allow the operator to individually customize specific security features for each menu option (submenu, parameter, pick list, and function). These fields are shown in parameter dumps and have the following meanings. Lvl is the term for the security level. Setting R=1 blocks parameter change, and setting H=1 hides the menu option from view until the appropriate access level has been activated.

MemoryMemory is the working storage area for the drive that is a collection of RAM chips.

Microprocessor A microprocessor is a central processing unit (CPU) that exists on a single silicon chip. The microprocessor board is the printed circuit board on which the microprocessor is mounted. The drive employs a single-board computer with a Pentium® microprocessor.

NEMA 1 and NEMA 12NEMA 1 is an enclosure rating in which no openings allow penetration of a 0.25-inch diameter rod. NEMA 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use only. NEMA 12 is a more stringent NEMA rating in which the cabinet is said to be "dust tight" (although it is still not advisable to use NEMA 12 in conductive dust atmospheres). The approximate equivalent IEC rating is IP52.

Normally closed (NC)Normally closed refers to the contact of a relay that is closed when the coil is de-energized.

Normally open (NO)Normally open refers to the contact of a relay that is open when the coil is de-energized.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication Manual238 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 241: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

OLTMAn acronym for Open Loop Test Mode, one of the control modes of the drive.

OLVCAn acronym for Open Loop Vector Control, also known as Encoderless Vector Control. OLVC is a flux vector control that is one of the control modes of the drive. The drive computes the rotational speed of the rotor and uses it for speed feedback.

OOSOOS is an abbreviation for out of saturation - a type of fault condition in which a voltage drop is detected across one of the IGBTs during conduction. This can indicate that the motor is drawing current too rapidly or in excess.

OROR is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if any of the inputs is true. In SOP notation, OR is represented as "+".

ParameterA parameter is one of four items found in the menu system. Parameters are system attributes that have corresponding values that can be monitored or, in some cases, changed by the user.

PED PED is an acronym for pressure equipment directive, a directive of the EU relating to pressure vessels.

Pick listA pick list is one of four items found in the menu system. Pick lists are parameters that have a finite list of pre-defined "values" from which to choose, rather than a value range used by parameters.

PIDPID is an acronym for proportional + integral + derivative, a control scheme used to control modulating equipment in such a way that the control output is based on (1) a proportional amount of the error between the desired setpoint and the actual feedback value, (2) the summation of this error over time, and (3) the change in error over time. Output contributions from each of these three components are combined to create a single output response. The amount of contribution from each component is programmable through gain parameters. By optimizing these gain parameters, the operator can "tune" the PID control loop for maximum efficiency, minimal overshoot, quick response time, and minimal cycling.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 239

Page 242: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Qualified userA qualified user is a properly trained individual who is familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.

RAMRAM is an acronym for Random Access Memory, a temporary storage area for drive information. The information in RAM is lost when power is no longer supplied to it. Therefore, it is referred to as volatile memory.

RegenerationRegeneration is the characteristic of an AC motor to act as a generator when the rotor’s mechanical frequency is greater than the applied electrical frequency.

RelayA relay is an electrically controlled device that causes electrical contacts to change their status. Open contacts will close and closed contacts will open when rated voltage is applied to the coil of a relay.

RS232CRS232C is a serial communications standard of the Electronics Industries Association (EIA).

Set pointSet point is the desired or optimal speed of the VFD to maintain process levels (speed command).

SlipSlip is the difference between the stator electrical frequency of the motor and the rotor mechanical frequency of the motor, normalized to the stator frequency as shown in the following equation:Slip = (ωS - ωR) / ωS

Slip compensationSlip compensation is a method of increasing the speed reference to the speed regulator circuit (based on the motor torque) to maintain motor speed as the load on the motor changes. The slip compensation circuit increases the frequency at which the inverter section is controlled to compensate for decreased speed due to load droop. For example, a motor with a full load speed of 1760 rpm has a slip of 40 rpm. The no load rpm would be 1800 rpm. If the motor nameplate current is 100 A, the drive is sending a 60 Hz wave form to the motor (fully loaded); then the slip compensation circuit would cause the inverter to run 1.33 Hz faster to allow the motor to operate at 1800 rpm, which is the synchronous speed of the motor.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication Manual240 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 243: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

SMCIs an acronym for Synchronous Motor Control, one of the control modes of the drive. This mode computes the rotational speed similarly to open-loop vector control, and controls the field reference or the synchronous motor as in closed-loop synchronous motor control.

SOP(1) SOP is an acronym for Sum Of Products. The term "sum-of-products" comes from the application of Boolean algebraic rules to produce a set of terms or conditions that are grouped in a fashion that represents parallel paths (ORing) of required conditions that all must be met (ANDing). This would be equivalent to branches of connected contacts on a relay logic ladder that connect to a common relay coil. In fact, the notation can be used as a shortcut to describe the ladder logic. (2) SOP, when used as a filename extension, refers to System Operating Program.

SOP UtilitiesThe program within the Siemens Tool suite used for converting between text and machine loadable code. It can also be used for uploading and downloading files over the RS232 connection.See Tool Suite definition.

Speed Menu functionSpeed menu is a feature of the menu system that allows the operator to directly access any of the menus or parameters, rather than scrolling through menus to the appropriate item. This feature uses the [Shift] button in conjunction with the right arrow. The user is prompted to enter the four digit ID number associated with the desired menu or parameter.

Stop modeStop mode is used to shut down the drive in a controlled manner, regardless of its current state.

SubmenusA submenu is one of four components found in the menu system. Submenus are nested menus (i.e., menus within other menus). Submenus are used to logically group menu items based on similar functionality or use.

Synchronous speedSynchronous speed refers to the speed of an AC induction motor’s rotating magnetic field. It is determined by the frequency applied to the stator and the number of magnetic poles present in each phase of the stator windings. Synchronous Speed equals 120 times the applied Frequency (in Hz) divided by the number of poles per phase.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 241

Page 244: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

System Operating ProgramThe functions of the programmable inputs and outputs are determined by the default system program. These functions can be changed by modifying the appropriate setup menus from the front keypad and display. I/O assignments can also be changed by editing the system program (an ASCII text file with the extension .SOP), compiling it using the compiler program, and then downloading it to the controller through its serial port, all by utilizing the SOP Utility Program with the Siemens ToolSuite.

Tool SuiteIs the suite of programs developed by Siemens that allows easier access to the drive for programming and monitoring. It is comprised of the following components:• Tool Suite Launcher - also referred to as Tool Suite; used for coordinating other tools.• SOP Utilities - used to launch an editor that compiles or reverse compiles a System Program.

It also allows for serial connection to the drive for uploading and downloading System Programs.

• Configuration Update - allows for backing-up, updating, and cloning drives via direct access to the Flash Disk.

• Host Simulator - used for monitoring, programming, and controlling a drive remotely from a PC over the built-in ethernet port of the drive. Parameter changes, status display, and graphing of internal variables are its main functions.

• Debug Tool - this tool is used to display the diagnostic screens of the drive for diagnosing drive problems or improving performance via the built-in ethernet port of the drive.

Tool Suite Launchersee Tool Suite definition.

TorqueThe force that produces (or attempts to produce) rotation, as in the case of a motor.

UploadingUploading is a process by which information is transmitted from the drive to a remote device such as a PC. The term uploading implies the transmission of an entire file of information (e.g., the system program) rather than continued interactive communications between the two devices. The use of a PC for uploading requires communications software to be available on the PC.

Variable frequency drive (VFD)A VFD is a device that takes a fixed voltage and fixed frequency AC input source and converts it to a variable voltage, variable frequency output that can control the speed of a motor.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication Manual242 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 245: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

VHZIs an acronym for Volts per Hertz control, one of the control modes in the drive. This mode is intended for multiple motors connected in parallel. Therefore, it disables spinning load and fast bypass. This is essentially open-loop vector control with de-tuned (smaller bandwidth obtained by reducing the gain) current regulators.

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 243

Page 246: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Glossary

NXGPro+ Communication Manual244 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 247: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Index

Aabbreviations, 227Access, 47, 77, 130, 157, 182Anybus Ethernet / IP module

Status indicators, 82Anybus Modbus Ethernet module

status indicator, 54status indicators, 136

Anybus Modbus Profibus modulestatus indicators, 108

Anybus™, (Cross reference)Anybus™ ContolNet™, 164Anybus™ Profibus™ module

Subentry, Arcing, 16Asynchronous motors, 13Auxiliary power supply, 13

CCabling, 13Commissioning, 13Common Industrial Protocol (CIP), 81ControlNet, 20

DDeviceNet, 20display

editing values, 218display network monitor, 217dual network functionality, 107

EElectrostatic discharge, 17Electrostatic Protective Measures, 18EMC-compliant installation, 13Ethernet / IP communication interface, 81Ethernet /IP, 20

FFive safety rules, 14

GGrounding, 13GSD file

PTO guidelines, 133

IIndustrial network, 13input bits

programming, 84Installation, 13

LLock-out / Tag-out procedure, 15

MModbus

address, 30, 62commands, 51

Modbus Ethernet, 53module

display type, 20motor speed setting to the drive, 46, 77, 102, 129, 156, 181Multiplexer (MUX) data registers, 225

setup, 225

Nnetwork register

viewing values, 217Network Setup Procedure, 46, 76, 101, 129, 156, 181NXGpro Control, 53NXGpro Plus Control, 23NXGpro+ Control, 51

OODVA, 135output bits

programming, 28, 59, 86, 113, 141, 168

NXGPro+ Communication ManualFunction Manual, AA, A5E50226719 245

Page 248: NXGPro+ Communication Manual

Pparameter read/write function, 219parameters

comparators, 210display network monitor, 217external analog inputs, 208external analog outputs, 208from drive communication, 214historic log variables, 211internal analog outputs, 203internal test points, 204meter status variables, 211network 1, 32, 64, 89, 117, 144, 172network 2, 34, 66, 91, 119, 146, 174pick list types, 187to drive communication, 213

PFD registerdefining, 220setup, 219, 223

pick list valuescomparators, 210external analog inputs, 208external analog outputs, 208from drive communication, 214internal analog outputs, 203internal test points, 204meter status variables, 211to drive communication, 213

PLC, 219Profibus, 20Profibus Trade Organization, 107Profibus™ network, 107, 133protocol

ControlNet, 20DeviceNet, 20, 135Modbus Ethernet, 53Profibus, 20, 107

ProtocolControlNet, 163

PTD registerdefining, 221setup, 219, 223

RRemote Terminal Unit, 53

Ssecurity code, 47, 77, 157Security code, 130, 182Shielding, 13Status Indicator, 164symbols, 227Synchronous motors, 13

TTCP/IP, 53Transport, 13

VVariable-Speed Drives, 13

Index

NXGPro+ Communication Manual246 Function Manual, AA, A5E50226719

Page 249: NXGPro+ Communication Manual
Page 250: NXGPro+ Communication Manual